教案课件是老师上课做的提前准备,因此在写的时候就不要草草了事了。写好教案课件,可以避免老师遗忘重要内容,你是否在寻找合适的教案课件呢?本篇文章是趣祝福在网络上精心整理的“七年级英语上册课件”,如果您认为这篇文章有价值还请收藏这篇文章!此外,您还可以浏览范文大全栏目的广告合同汇总。
七年级英语上册课件 篇1
课前准备
教师:准备游戏时所用的图片(食物、蔬菜、动物)。
学生:准备表演时所需道具(服装、假发)。
教学设计
Step One :Present the sentence patterns.1.Play a game “How many words do you know?”(利用小游戏调动学生的积极性,同时通过对冠军的介绍引出本课。)
Teacher: After the study of the first three starters, I think most of the students must have known a lot of words.How many words do you know? Let’s play a game to see who know? Let’s play a game to see who knows the most.(Divide all the students into several groups and show a picture(图片略)to them with the computer.Every group can choose two students to join.They are asked to come to the blackboard and write down the words in 30 seconds.)
(Group 2 is the champion group.They can write 11 words.)
2.Introduce the champion group to the class.(引课方式贴近生活,学生易于接受)
Teacher: Congratulations, now Group 2 is the champion.But I don’t know your names.Would you like to introduce yourselves to us?
S1& S2:Yes.S1:Hello.My name is Li Lei.Nice to meet you.Ss: Hello, Li Lei.Nice to meet you ,too.Ss: Hello!What’s your name?
S2:I’m Sun Ping.How do you do?
Ss: How do you do ?
Step Two: Drills.1.Make introductions.(通过句型的操练使学生更加熟练掌握所学的句式。)
Teacher: The new term begins.Everyone will meet many new classmates.Do you want to make friends with them? If your answer is “yes”, please introduce yourself in your group.Example:
Sa: Hello!I’m Li Lei.What’s your name?
Sb: My name’s Zhang Feng.Nice to meet you.Sa: Nice to meet you, too.And what’s your name, please?
Sc: Lin Li.How do you do?
Sa:How do you do?
2.Listen and number the conversations.Teacher: Today I have good news for you.Three new students will come to our class.They are from other countries.Do you want to know them? Let’s listen to the recording of 1b in Section A.(Students listen to the tape and give the right answers.)
Step Three: Make friends.1.Make new friends.(用谈话的方式完成任务,生动活泼,同时更容易向学生进行美德教育。)
Teacher: Now everyone has some new friends.Do you want others to know them? Do you want more friends? Let’s introduce our new friends to others, OK?
Ss: OK.Example:
Sa: This is my new friend.His name is Sun Nan.Sb: Hello, Sun Nan.Nice to meet you.Sc: Nice to meet you, too.Look!This is my new friend.Her name is He Lu.Ss: How do you do?
Sd: How do you do?
(Students can stand up and introduce their friends to others freely.They can greet each other warmly.Everyone in the class can have more friends.They can also know something else about them.)
2.The New comers.(以表演的形式完成,使课堂气氛达到高潮。)
Teacher: Just now I said three new students from other countries would come to our class.Now, look!They are here.Let’s give them a warm welcome.(Three “foreign”students come in and all the students clap warmly.)
Teacher: It’s their first time to come to China.Would you like to listen to their introductions?
Ss: Yes.(Three students can make introductions and act out the dialogue vividly.)
Step Three: Sum up.Some students are asked to sum up this lesson.It is how to make new friends and how to greet them.It is very important in the daily life.Homework
“How do you meet new visitors at home?
Period Two
课前准备
教师:准备歌曲磁带(歌词)、情景图片及上课所需表格。
学生:需要向父母了解自已名字的含义。
教学设计
Step One: Revise the sentence patterns.1.Sing an English song.(用唱歌的方式既带动了气氛,又复习了所学内容。)
Teacher: Yesterday we’ve known each other already.Do you remember your new friends’names? If you do, let’s sing the song “What’s your name?”.Hello!Hello!What’s your name? My name’s Gina.Hello!Hello!What’s his name? His name’s Peter.Hello!Hello!What’s her name? Her name’s Anna.2.Listen to the conversations and finish the exercises.Teacher: Yesterday I made a new friend.Her name is Jenny.She is very lovely.She introduces many friends of hers to me.Do you want to know about them? Let’s listen to the tape and find out some useful information.(Students listen to the tape and give the right answers.)
3.Act out the dialogues.(在特定的情景下表演对话更符合实际,更贴近生活。)
Teacher: Now you’ve known something about introductions and greetings.But if you are in other places, how do you introduce yourself and greet others? Look at the four pictures and imagine you are in such a situation, how do you get to know new friends?
(Students can choose any picture they like and act out the dialogues.)
Example:
(At a party)
Sa: Hello!I’m Lucy Green.What’s your name?
Sb: My name is Kate Brown, Jim’s classmate.Nice to meet you.Sa: Nice to meet you, too.I’m Jim’s sister.Welcome to Jim’s birthday party.Make yourself at home.Sb: Thanks, I will.Step Two: Choose English names.1.Play a name game.(有效引出“英文名字”这一主题。)
Teacher:As we know, everyone has a name.Each name has its special meaning and so do English names.Do you want to have an English name? If you do, let’s play a name game.The winners of the game will get English names.Rules: Every student should introduce himself or herself,but at the same time he(she)should repeat all the above-mentioned classmates' names.Example:
S1: My name’s Tony.S2: His name’s Tony.My name’s Linda.S3: His name’s Tony.Her name’s Linda.My name’s Nick.S4: His name’s Tony.Her name’s Linda.His name's Nick.My name's Kim.S5:…….2.Choose English names.1).Find out first names and last names.(用小组的方式完成名字的识别。)
Teacher: Congratulations to the winners.Now you choose English names from the box.But before you choose names, you must know English names have two parts: first name and last name.Look at the box, can you classify them according to the demands?
Jenny Gina Alan Mary Jim Tony Tom Bob MikeGreen Miller Jack Smith Brown Linda Nick Kim HandPeriod Three
课前准备
教师:准备所需的歌曲磁带、名片样本及各项表格。
学生:制作名片所需的纸张、画笔等。
教学设计
Step One: Present the English numbers.1.Sing the song “Ten Little Indian Boys”.(歌曲欢快有趣,比起单纯教授单词更为有效。)
Teacher: During the first two classes, we’ve known something about new friends names.But if we want to contact them.What shall we do?
S1: A telephone call.T: But you don’t have their telephone numbers.S1: Ask for their telephone numbers.T: If we want to know about their telephone numbers, we must learn how to say these numbers in English.Let’s learn to sing “Ten Little Indian Boys”.Words
One little, two little, three little Indisns,Four little, five little, six little Indians,Seven little, eight little, nine little Indians,Ten little Indian boys.(After singing the song, tell the students not to forget “zero”.)
T: Count the number together from zero to nine.S2: Zero…
2.Listen to the conversation and write the telephone number.(通过听力复习单词。)
Teacher: This is my friend’s telephone number.But I can’t hear it uld you please help me write it down?
(Students listen to the recording of 1b in Section B and give the answer.)
Step Two: Drills.1.Make a survey about your partners’ telephone numbers.(调查组内成员的电话号码,重点练习所学句式。)
Teacher: Thank you for your help.But do you want to know your friends’ telephone numbers? Now let’s make a survey about it and try to fill in the chart.
NameTelephone numbersLi LeiLiu Yu
Lin Fang
Yin Kailin
S1: Hello, Liu Yu.What’s your telephone number?
S2: My telephone number is …
S1: Oh, thank you.What about yours, Lin Fang?
S3: It’s…
S1: … And may I know your phone number, Yin Kailin?
S4: …
S1: Thank you very much.Oh, I nearly forgot.My telephone number is…
2.Report it to the class.(After the survey, every group can choose a student to report the survey result to the class.)
Example:
My telephone number is… Liu Yu’s phone number is… Lin Fang’s telephone number is… Yin Kailin’ s phone number is…
3.Listen and match the names and telephone numbers.(制作电话号码簿这一任务能够大面积调动学生装的参与意识。)
Teacher: I will play the recording twice.The first time just listen.The second time, write the letter of the person’s telephone number in the space after that person’s name.(Students listen to the tape.)
T: Next, I’ll play the recording again.This time, fill in the missing numbers.(Students listen to the tape again.)
T: Can you find out whose telephone numbers they are ?
S:…
4.Make an address book.Teacher: The new term begins.Our class needs an address book to contact each other.Now we can put all the information together and then we can have our own address book.Pay attention to the address book headings “Names” and “Phone numbers”.Now work in groups of six and ask your group members “What’s his /her name? And What’s his/her phone number?”
Step Three: Make an ID card. some different ID cards to the class and try to enjoy them.(向学生展示不同种类的名片,一方面开阔学生眼界,一方面便于学生找出名片所含内容。)(引导学生有效搜集名片上的信息,提高学生的阅读能力。)
Teacher: Now our class has a very useful address book.We can use it to talk with others on the phone.But for most adults, ID cards are more important because they are easy to take along.What’s more, they are very enjoyable.Sometimes they can show the owners’ special personalities.Look at the ID cards below and try to enjoy them.Teacher: From the cards above, what can you find out ?
S1: It must have a person’s name…
S2: Sometimes it has a motto.T: Yes, It must have a person’s name, postcode, telephone number, home address and e-mail address.So if you have a chance to make an ID card, you must think about all the above.But before you make your card, first let’s learn how to get information from the card.It’s very important.2.Read the ID card and answer the questions.(提供参考信息,但允许学生创新。)
Teacher: Look!Here’s an ID card of my friend’s.Please look at it and find out some useful information about her.1.What’s her telephone number?
2.What’s her family name?
3.What’s her first name?
Homework
1.Students are asked to make ID Cards of their own.Demands: A.Useful information must be included.B.It can be designed as beautifully as possible.C.Students may show their own personalities if possible.2.Find out the information about the famous person.Period Four
课前准备
教师:准备评价表、名人图片和一张个人海报。
学生:准备好完成的名片参加展览。
教学设计
Step One: Make an ID card show. the ID cards to the students.Teacher: Yesterday all of you made some beautiful ID we’ll make a show here.Let’s enjoy it together and try to choose the best ones.2.Find the owner of the card.Teacher: The ID card show is over.All the cards are mixed together.I can’t find the owners.Who can help me?
S1:I can.(Show one of the cards to another students.)
S1:Excuse me, are you in...?
S2:Yes, I am.S1:What’s your telephone number?
S2:It’s...S1:Are you...?
S2:Yes, I am.S1:Here’s your ID card.S2:Thank you.(Teacher asks more students to find the owners of ID cards).Step Two: “Face to Face”.1.Play a guessing game.Teacher: ID cards are useful.But some persons’names are known to all the people.They are very famous.Now look at the pictures and guess their names.(The teacher shows some famous person’s pictures and students guess their names and give their answers.)
llect useful information.Teacher: These persons are very famous.But it’s better for us to know something else about them.Before class you’ve been asked to collect some information.Now let’s exchange it together.3.Report it to class.Each group can choose a student to give a report about their favourite person.The other students can ask him some questions in class.Example:
S1:This is Michael Jordan.He’s years old.He’s...He speaks...His birth place is...He is a famous...player.He’s a member of six Chicago Bulls championship teams.People like to call him “Air Jordan”.S2:Do you like Michael Jordan? Why or Why not?
S1:Yes, I like him very much because he’s so...S2:Do you want to be a basketball player like him?
S1:Of course I do.That’s my dream.Step Three: Make a poster about yourself.Teacher: Do you want to be famous all over the world?
First you must learn to show yourself.Now you have a chance to do that.Please try to make a poster about yourself.In your poster you should try to introduce yourself.(Students can write a passage about themselves.They can give some personal information.They can alse design the poster as well as they can.)
Homework
Students are asked to sun up this unit, especially about how to talk with others politely.
七年级英语上册课件 篇2
一 学生情况分析(学生62人,其中男生:36人,女生:26 人)
1.学习水平不均
有的学生对小学英语比较重视,学得很好;但有的学生或学校不重视,学得很不好,还有几个甚至完全没有学过。有的学生笔试不错,但语音、语调、书写都有待加强。因此,整个班级的英语水平很不平衡,给日常教学带来诸多的不便,提高了难度。
2.学习习惯不好
学生刚刚从小学进入初中,处于一个衔接的阶段,学习任务加重,学习的习惯不是很好,没有形成一定的适合自己的方法,都有待改善。
总之,既要避免好生吃不饱的.现象,又要努力把目前英语有欠缺的学生拉上去,激发他们的兴趣和信心,赶上中上的水平学生。在今后的教学中应该注重培养、激发兴趣,教给学生学习的方法,从学生的学习兴趣、学习能力、生活经验和认知水平出发,倡导体验、实践、参与与交流的学习方式和任务型的教学途径,发展学生的综合语言运用能力,使语言的学习过程成为学生形成积极的情感态度、主动思维和大胆实践、提高跨文化意识和形成学生自主学习能力的过程,这是新课标和新目标英语的要求。
教学措施和辅助
二 课时总安排
总共100课时:授课 课时 复习 课时
测试 课时 机动 课时
三.教材总体目标、单元要求及重难点
The goal:
The goal of Go for it is to make language a step-by-step progression that builds confidence and leads to open-ended activities where students can actively relate learning to their personal lives.
Go For It! 是以《英语课程标准》为依据,以学生的英语语言综合运用能力为目标。不仅以语言知识、语言技能为重点,而且更注重学生的学习策略、情感态度和文化意识。教学内容的处理和取舍灵活开放, 只要教师从学生的实际水平和语言能力出发,任何教学内容的调整或取舍,任何教学步骤的安排都是可行的。“I sometimes go to the last to do the group work first…It depends on the teachers’ knowledge of the students actual language ability…”(David Nunan);提倡教师结合学生实际,充分利用学生、教师本身和环境中一切可以利用的资源,丰富教学内容,创造运用英语的机会,注意多渠道开发教学资源。 “Don’t use just the textbook. Anything in real life that connect and appropriate to the lesson can be used as teaching resources.”(David Nunan);提倡任务型语言教学,教学进度整体把握,教学形式不拘一格;课堂以学生为主体,以任务为主线,重视体验参与,课后访谈调查,读写扎记,重视语言运用;正视个体差异,倡导过程激励,以多层次、多角度、多主体的结果与过程并重的评价方式激励进步。
The key points of each unit:
Topic Functions Structures
U 1 Making new friends Introduce yourself
Greet people
Ask for and give telephone numbers Present tense to be
What questions
Prossessive adjectives:my,your,his,her
U2 Things in the classroom
Identify ownerships Demonstratives:this,that
What questions and Yes/No questions
How do you spell pen?
U3 The family Introduce people
Identify people Demonstratives:these,those
Subject pronouns:I,he,she
Yes/No questions
Plural nouns
U4 Things around the house Talk about where things are Where questions and Yes/No questions
Prepositions: on,in,under
Subject pronouns: they
U5 Spending time with friends Ask and answer questions about ownership
Make suggestions Present tense to have
Yes/No questions and short answers: let’s
Adjectives of quality
U6
Food Talk about likes and dislikes Present tense to like
Yes/No questions and short answers
Affirmative and negative statements
U7
Shopping Ask about prices
Talk about clothing
Thank someone Demonstratives:this,that,these,those
How much questions
U8
Dates Talk about dates When questions
Prossessive “s”
How old are you?
U9
Movies Talk about preferences
Make plans Present tense to want
Yes/No questions and short answers:
Adjectives of quality
U10 Joining a club Talk about abilities Modal verb can
Yes/No questions and short answers:
Affirmative and negative statements
What questions
U11 Daily routines Talk about daily routines
Ask about and say times When questions
What time is it?
Adverbs of frequency
U 12 School subjects Talk about preferences
Give reasons What questions
Why questions
Who questions
Adjectives of quality
四、 教材分析
新目标任务型教学的特色理念:《新目标英语》是以任务为基础的语言教学,在教材的设计上,遵循了自然言语、情境真实性、语言形式为交流功能性服务、层层深入阶梯型发展语言能力、在做中学等最新教学原则和理念,注重引导学生体会文化差异,培养学生自主学习能力,完全符合教育部的《义务教育阶段英语课程标准》的要求。本教材的教学理念:“知识用于行动”,强调“语言应用”,培养“创新、实践能力”,发展“学习策略”。
人教社《新目标英语》教材的几大特色:
A. 图文并茂。一幅副充满情趣,幽默生动的画面,令你眼睛一亮。它不仅版面设计充满新意,而且在内容和结构方面更富有创意 更具时代感,更有现代气息,更加贴近学生的生活。学生一拿到课本后都爱不释手,迫不及待地翻阅。
B. 实用性强。每个单元的选材都来源于学生的学习和生活。紧紧地与学生的年龄特征、认知结构、生活经验联系在一起。如第一册的十四个话题:认识新朋友、教室里的物品、家庭成员、食品、购物、电影、参加社团、生活习惯、学习科目、国家与语言。第二册的十二个话题:邻居、动物、足球、职业、周末活动、音乐、人物性格与外貌、天气、节日、度假与休闲、流行文化、规章制度与日常生活。由于这些都是学生熟悉的话题,生活中经常碰到的事情,所以学生容易接受,学习热情自然也高。使教学活动由“要我学”转变为“我要学”。
C.注重交际。针对中国学生学英语普遍存在的“聋哑病”,教材设计了大量的听说读写材料。每个单元都有语言活动,且内容不同,形式多样,学生对这些活动充满兴趣,所以大家都能情绪高昂地参加pair work, group work, games等活动。学生们充满了自信,开心地练习说英语,教室里常常充满了欢歌笑语。同学们都喜欢上英语课,他们能为学以致用而感到兴奋,同时也体验到了学习语言的快乐。
D.词汇量大。第一册有词汇700个左右,第二册约450个,第三册约450个,第四册约400个, 第五册约500个,合计2500个。这一点正好达到《英语课程标准》5级的要求。大大丰富了学生的词汇量,让学生能更好地表达自己的所思所想。同时也要求学生必须采取有效的记忆单词的方法,就会事半功倍,否则难以适应教材的要求。这时学生特别需要教师的指导 .。
《新目标英语》的教材设计原则
a.言语、情境真实性原则 (The authenticity principle)
任务的设计要提供给学习者明确、真实的语言信息。语言情境、语言形式等要符合交际的功能和规律。使学习者在一种自然、真实或模拟真实的情境中体会语言、掌握语言的应用。
b.形式-功能性原则 (The form-function principle)
任务的设计注重语言形式和语言功能的结合。形式-功能性原则,旨在使学习者掌握语言形式的同时,培养其自我把握语言功能的能力;每一阶段任务的设计都具有一定的导入性,学生在学习语言形式的基础上,通过系列任务的训练,能够自己进行推理和演绎,从而理解语言的功能,并在交际中进行真实运用。
c.阶梯型任务原则 (The task dependency principle)
学习单元中任务的设计由简到繁,由易到难,层层深入,并形成由初级任务到高级任务并由高级任务涵盖初级任务的循环。在语言技能方面,遵循先听、读,后说、写的设计顺序,使教学阶梯式地层层递进。
d. 在做中学原则 (Learning by doing)
自始至终引导学生通过完成具体的任务活动来学习语言,让学生为了特定的学习目的去实施特定的语言行动,通过完成特定的交际任务来获得和积累相应的学习经验。
五、教学具体措施及辅助活动
1.利用直观教具和教学辅助媒体,激发兴趣,增加容量,整体优化课堂教学。
2.每日进行单词竞赛。
3.学唱英文歌。
4.坚持值日生报告。
5.开展多种游戏和竞赛活动。
六、教学进度表
Week 1 Starter Unit 1 5课时
Week 2 Starter Unit 2& Starter Unit 3 5课时
Week 3 Unit 1 6课时
Week 4 Unit 2 6课时
Week 5 Unit 3 6课时
Week 6 Revision 6课时
Week 7 Unit4 6课时
Week8 Unit 5 6课时
Week 9 Unit 6 6课时
Week 10 Revision 6课时
Week 11 Middle examination 6课时
Week 12 Unit 7 6课时
Week 13 Unit 8 6课时
Week 14 Unit 9 6课时
Week 15 Unit 10 6课时
Week 16 Unit 11 6课时
Week 17 Unit 12 6课时
Week 18 Revision 6课时
Week 19 Revision 6课时
Week 20 Final examination
七年级英语上册课件 篇3
一.单元分析
本单元以家庭为话题,以家庭介绍为任务学习That’s my sister. These are my brothers. Who is she?等句型的使用。要求学生能够做到:
1.运用这些句型向别人介绍某人的能力和与人交际的能力;
2.能向别人介绍自己的家庭情况;
3.在珍视自己的家庭,珍爱亲情的同时,关心不幸家庭的同学,对他们做力所能及的帮助。
二.学情分析
学生在小学中已经学习过一些家庭成员称呼的知识,对于一些简单的称谓表达没有问题,但书写仍然是有问题的。同时,由于中西方文化的差异,中国家庭中的一些关系可能不好表达,老师需要做必要的补充。
另外,由于计划生育政策的施行,同学们的兄弟姐妹少了,这对于brother, sister的概念的表达可能有些不利。但是,中国是一个注重家庭的国家,本单元的学习会让学生了解不同国家的家庭结构间的不同。同时由于班级内可能有来自单亲家庭的同学,在授课时要注意保护学生,不要伤及学生的自尊,同时要注意培养学生的移情能力。
三.课时安排
四课时
四.教学过程
Period 1 (A1, 3a, B3)
I. Teaching Objectives
1. Knowledge Objectives:
(1) Expressions: sister, mother, father, parent, brother, grandmother, grandfather, grandparent, family, those, who, oh, these, those, they.
(uncle, aunt, cousin, niece, nephew, here, photo )
(2) Structure: That’s my family. Those are my parents. Who’s she? She’s my sister. Oh, and these are my brothers.
3) Grammar: The plural forms of the demonstrative pronouns.
2. Ability Objectives:
(1) Learn how to introduce the family.
(2) Get Ss to know the names of the various members of a family.
3. Moral Objectives: Father and mother, I love you!
II. Teaching Importance(focus)
(1) Learn how to introduce the family.
(2) Get Ss to know the names of the various members of a family.
(3) Get Ss to know the differences between this/that is and these/those are.
(4) Get Ss to know who questions
III. Teaching Difficulties
1. 因为单复数的问题,学生对this与these,that与those的转换可能会弄错,
2. 在拼写时,学生习惯把mother写成monther。
3. grandmother,grandfather中d不发音。
Ⅳ. Teaching Aids
A recorder, multi-media
Ⅴ. Teaching Procedure:
Step l:Lead in
Enjoy an English song called the Finger Family, do daily greetings as usual.
Step 2: Pre-task
1. T: Today I’ll introduce a new friend.
Then show a picture of a boy to teacher new words about family members.
2. Work on 1a, match the words.
3. Listening practice: Do A 1b, first listen and circle the words, then imitate.
4. Look at the picture on SB P7, ask and answer in pairs.
Step 3:While-task
Photo show. 1.T ask and S answer
2. Ss ask and answer in pairs. Then Do A3a
3. Make a short passage about the photo. Then Do B 2b.
step 4:Post-task
Draw a photo of family and write about it, then share with friends.
Step 4. Sum up
Do exercises in class and check the answers
Homework
1.完成2号本P14-15 第一课时
2. 预习Unit 2 第二课时
3. 完成 Self check 2
4. 常规听读,听写作业
Layout of Bb
Unit 2 This is my sister. Period 1
sister, mother, father, parent, brother, grandmother, grandfather, grandparent, family, those, who, oh, these, those, they.
That’s my family.
Those are my parents.
Who’s she?
She’s my sister.
Oh, and these are my brothers.
教学反思:
Period 2 (A2)
I. Teaching Objectives
1. Knowledge Objectives:
(1) Expressions: well, have, day, bye, goodbye
(2) Structure: Have a good! Thanks! You, too. Bye!
— Nice to meet you. — Nice to meet you, too
(3) Grammar: Yes or No questions.
2. Ability Objectives:
(1) Identifying people and the relationship.
(2) Find out the correct relationship.
七年级英语上册课件 篇4
一、教学设计思路
用真实衣物做道具模拟情境,帮助学生练习谈论物品的颜色和价格;配以图片、视频歌曲等多媒体手段,加深学生印象。
二、教学目标
(一)知识
1.掌握如何谈论物品的颜色和价格:Howmuchis/are…?It's/They're…dollars.black,white,red,green,blue,yellow
2.掌握衣物的名称:socks,T-shirts,pants,shorts,sweater,hat
3.掌握数字10-31
4.掌握购物礼貌用语:CanIhelpyou?I'lltake…Thankyou.You'rewelcome.
(二)能力
能够在生活中买必要的东西。
(三)情感
在生活中要应用礼貌用语。
三、教学重点
谈论价钱
四、教学难点
结合物品的颜色、数量等询问和回答价钱。
五、教学媒体
常见衣物;电脑;投影仪
六、教学过程
(一)巧妙导入
方法1:通过询问学生衣服的颜色复习颜色词汇,进而引出衣物的话题。
方法2:拿出不同种类的衣物引起学生注意,进入话题
以上就是出国留学网小编给各位朋友带来的七年级上册英语教案范文是怎样的?希望本文分享的英语教案范文能对各位朋友有所帮助!
七年级英语上册课件 篇5
教学内容:Unit 6 Do you like bananas?
教材解读
本单元主要讨论各种食物以及喜欢或不喜欢某种食物;询问某人是否喜欢某种食物及回答;会描述一日三餐,会合理搭配一日三餐。
like的一般现在时、一般疑问句及肯、否定回答;肯定句和否定句。
通过本单元的学习,认识到在平日饮食中要做到不挑食、不偏食、合理饮食。
教学目标
一、知识与技能
1.掌握基本词汇:food、banana、hamburger、tomato、broccoli、French fries、strawberry、orange、ice cream、salad。
2.掌握句型:Do you like bananas? Yes, I do./No, I don’t.二、过程与方法
通过听说读写等任务型活动,熟练应用所学单词和动词词组。
三、情感态度和价值观
认识并了解各种食物,能分清水果和蔬菜并能认识到水果和蔬菜对人体有益。通过询问对方是否喜欢某食物来引起话题。
教学重点
基本单词、词汇和句型。
教学难点
1.认识并掌握重点词汇。
2.能流利地与对方开展关于食物喜好的对话。教法导航
采用任务型教学途径并配以多媒体辅助教学,同时考虑学生的不同层次采取分层递进的教学方法。
学法导航
让学生在游戏的情景中感受到轻松愉悦、民主和谐的环境气氛,学生积极主动参与,从而产生了强烈的求知愿望,增强学习兴趣。
教学准备
PPT、关于食物的图片。教学过程
Step 1: Greetings.Greet the students as usual.Step 2: Revision Show the students pictures and ask:What’s this? It’s a soccer ball.Do you have a soccer ball? Yes, I do./No, I don’t.Do you like it? Yes, I do./No, I don’t.Step 3: New words Show the students some food and ask:
2What’s this? It’s a hamburger.Do you like it? Yes, I do./No, I don’t.What are these? They’re bananas.Do you like bananas? Yes, I do./No, I don’t.运用图片和对话教学单词:hamburger、banana、tomato、broccoli、French fries、strawberry、orange、ice cream、salad,并运用这些单词进行对话。
Step 4: Pair work Work in pairs and try to match the words with the pictures of 1a.Step 5: Listening 1b Listen and number the conversations.After listening, show the dialogue on the screen and get the students to practice the conversations, and then make their own conversations.Step 6: Listening Listen and circle the food you hear.First get the students to check their answers in groups and then report their answers.Step 7: Listen again Listen again and fill in the blanks.I like hamburgers.Do you like hamburgers? Yes, I do.Do you like______? No, I don’t like ______.Let’s have _______.Oh, no.I don’t like_________.Step 8: Group work Make a food survey in groups by asking: Do you like...? Then fill in the blanks to complete the form.How many students like hamburgers? How many students like bananas? Step 9: Summary Let’s sum what we have learned this class.Words:banana, hamburger, tomato, ice cream, salad, strawberry.Sentences:Do you like hamburgers? Yes, I do./No, I don’t.Step 10: Homework 1.Remember the words in this class.2.Practise the dialogue in pairs.课堂作业
1.写出下列名词
(1)汉堡 ____________(2)西红柿 _____________(3)沙拉 ____________(4)草莓 ____________(5)梨 ____________(6)牛奶 __________(7)面包 __________(8)冰激凌 _________2.根据句意完成句子
(1)A:_______ you like salad? B:No, I _______./Yes, I ______.(2)I __________(喜欢)hamburgers.(3)_____________(你喜欢)hamburgers?(4)____________(我们吃)strawberries.参考答案:
1.(1)hamburger(2)tomato(3)salad(4)strawberry(5)pear(6)milk(7)bread(8)ice cream
2.(1)Do, don’t, do(2)like(3)Do you like(4)Let’s教学反思
这节课以学生的日常生活为话题,用丰富多彩的实物和图片激发学生的学习兴趣,学生踊跃参加课堂活动,效果很好。
七年级英语上册课件 篇6
人教版七年级上册英语课件
Unit12 My favorite subject is science课件.rarUnit12 My favorite subject is science课件3.rarUnit12 My favorite subject is science课件2.rarUnit11 What time do you go to school课件.rarUnit11 What time do you go to school课件3.rarUnit11 What time do you go to school课件2.rarUnit10 Can you play the guitar课件.rarUnit10 Can you play the guitar课件3.rarUnit10 Can you play the guitar课件2.rarUnit9 Do you want to go to a movie课件.rarUnit9 Do you want to go to a movie课件3.rarUnit9 Do you want to go to a movie课件2.rarUnit8 When is your birthday PPT课件.rarUnit8 When is your birthday PPT课件3.rarUnit8 When is your birthday PPT课件2.rarUnit7 How much are these pants课件.rarUnit7 How much are these pants课件3.rarUnit7 How much are these pants课件2.rarUnit6 Do you like bananas PPT课件.rarUnit6 Do you like bananas PPT课件2.rar
Unit5 Do you have a soccer ball课件.rarUnit5 Do you have a soccer ball课件2.rarUnit4 Where's my backpack PPT课件.rarUnit4 Where's my backpack PPT课件2.rarUnit3 This is my sister PPT课件.rarUnit3 This is my sister PPT课件2.rarUnit2 Is this your pencil PPT课件.rarUnit2 Is this your pencil PPT课件2.rarUnit1 My name's Gina PPT课件.rar
七年级英语上册课件 篇7
一、教学目标
1、知识目标
(1)学习并掌握描述天气的词汇:rainy、windy、sunny、cloudy、snowy
(2)掌握句型结构:
—How is the weather(in +地点)?/What’s the weather like?(in +地点)?
—It’s rainy/windy/sunny/cloudy/snowy.2、能力目标
学会使用本单元的单词和句型询问天气并作出恰当的应答。
3、情感目标
(1)通过小组合作完成任务,培养学生团结合作的意识。
(2)通过谈论天气,了解一些地理常识。
(3)通过学习天气,培养学生的乐观积极向上的心态。
二、教学重难点
1、教学重点
(1)描述天气的词汇:rainy、windy、sunny、cloudy、snowy
(2)掌握句型结构:
—How is the weather(in +地点)? /What’s the weather like?(in +地点)?
—It’s rainy/windy/sunny/cloudy/snowy.2、教学难点
(1)名词转换形容词的构词法:sun—sunny、rain—rainy、wind—windy、cloud—cloudy、snow—snowy
(2)国外城市的读音和拼音
三、教学方法
教师采用任务型教学方法让学生主动参与小组合作探究,迅速有效地开展各项活动。
四、教学辅助工具:黑板、多媒体设备
五、教学过程:
1、热身运动
(1)师生共唱“rain? go? away”, 活跃课堂气氛。
(2)做个模拟下雨的游戏,引出本课有关天气的话题。
2、导入生词:
(1)以weather为中心词,让学生进行头脑风暴,回忆有关天气的词汇,然后观看PPT图片导入本课新单词:rainy、windy、sunny、cloudy、snowy
(2)教师带读,让学生熟记单词。
3、呈现句型
(1)给出句型结构:
—How is the weather(in +地点)? /What’s the weather like?(in +地点)?
—It’s rainy/windy/sunny/cloudy/snowy.(2)分别用两个句型进行游戏比赛,让学生在游戏中反复巩固新句型和新知识点。
4、听力练习,课本37页,1b5、PPT呈现中国气象地图,让学生小组讨论并抽代表上讲台模拟天气预报,并作出评价。
6、课堂总结:总结本节课所学单词和句型
7、课堂练习
8、情感升华
六、教学反思
1、课堂板书设计得应该更能适合本节课的总结这一环节,以后注意板书的书写
2、课堂口语需加强,有些突发状况还不能立即用英语表达。
七年级英语上册课件 篇8
各位老师:
大家好!今天我要说课的内容是新目标七年级英语上册第二单元Section A的前部分,题目是Is this your pencil ?其主要的内容是学会辨认物品的所有者这一话题。由于本单元具有两部分Section A和Section B。从本单元来说,本节课既是本单元的基本语言内容,又为本单元知识扩展和综合语言运用奠定坚实的基础。因此,上好Section A的前部分,既可让知识学习具有一定的延续性,又可为下面的教学做好铺垫,对完成本单元和今后的英语教学具有重要的意义。
重点、难点及处理对于Secttion A前部分的教学,我准备把对词汇的掌握和听力的理解作为重点,把结队活动的核心对话作为难点。这是因为我校地处农村,学生在英语学习方面没有一个好的语言氛围,也没有听力训练的条件,因此解决这一重点,能让学生进一步感受英语语言的美,体验知识间的相互应用、相互依存的联系,让学生充满自信,体验成就感和合作精神。
教学方法为达到以上的教育教学目标,根据英语“课标”中强调课程要从学生的学习兴趣、生活经验和认知水平出发,倡导体验、实践、参入、合作与交流的学习方式和任务型的教学途径,发展学生的综合语言运用能力,是语言学习的过程成为学生主动参与、勤于动脑,提高跨文化意识的过程。根据学校和学生的实际,我将在教学中利用实物,采用任务型教学模式,运用情景教学法,结合听说法、竞赛法,以循序渐进的方式来进行教学。
首先,采用听说法和实物来导入和呈现本届的基本词汇和句型,目的在于用师生、生生互动的方式,激活学生对所学知识的已有体验,使学生对重点词语的识记经过一个由形象思维到抽象思维的转化过程,增强学生的记忆效果。其次,采用任务型教学途径,在活动中以循序渐进法,连锁操练,运用实物提示,展开竞赛等方式来突破重点,培养学生综合语言运用能力。这样不仅激活了学生的主体意识,而且在活学活用知识的过程中,增强了学生学习的自信心,从而体验到成功的喜悦。
学法教法的选择固然重要,但学法也必不可少。我们都知道,学生的学习过程并不是孤立于课堂教学之中,应遵循学生的身心发展规律和学习规律,指导学生进行个性化的学习,让学生在活动与交流中产生个性化的体验。《课标》明确指出:“英语课程应面向全体学生,力求为每个学生的充分发展创造条件。教师在教学的过程中要倡导学生体验、实践、参与、合作与交流的学习方式,结合课改精神和我校的学情,在本节教学中我主要采用小组自由合作学习的方式,由不同层次的学生组合成4人一小组。因为这样的合作学习方式能突出以人为本的教育思想,符合教育的宗旨,使学生个人之间的竞争转化为小组之间的竞争,既有助于培养学生的合作精神,团队意识以及集体观念,又有助于培养学生的竞争意识与能力,在活动中体验合作成功的快乐,体验实现自我价值的幸福。
七年级英语上册课件 篇9
新版七年级英语上册课件【1】
我说课的内容是北师大版数学七年级上册第三章的第一节课《字母能表示什么》,我主要从“教材分析”、“教法与学法分析”、“教学过程设计与说明”、“设计追求的特色”四个方面组织说课。
一、教材分析
(一)教材所处的地位
本节课北师大出版的新课程标准实验教材第三章的第一节课,在以前的学习中学生比较熟悉对具体数的操作,这是学生初次接触用较为抽象的字母来表示数,对字母表示数含义的理解有助于代数式以及方程的列出,是学习后续知识的关键。
(二)教学目标
1.知识目标:在现实情景中感受用字母表示数的意义,明确字母可以表示任何数,会用字母表示探索的规律,能用字母表示运算律和公式。
2.能力目标:经历探索数量关系,发现规律,运用字母表示规律,并通过运算验证规律的过程。
3.情感目标:一是体会字母表示数的意义,形成初步的符号感;二是进一步感受数学魅力,在学习过程中激发学生学习数学、探索数学奥妙的内在动力和外在的积极性,并在过程中培养学生的创新意识和实践能力。
(三)教学的重点、难点
1.立足本人的分析确定的:字母表示数的意义、数学规律的探索及符号表达,这些内容也是本课的难点。
2.可能基于学生个性差异、基础差异在学习过程中感觉困难的地方也是本课的难点。在教学过程中,我将认真注意,并尽力帮学生突破。
二、教法和学法分析
我校是定点的移民子女、进城务工子女就读学校,留守生在班级中占38%,学生的个性、基础能力差异很大,加上七年级学生处于小学与初中的衔接过渡初期,所以本节课我选择引导探索与分层教学相结合的方法。在新知的引出过程中,注意由浅入深,由特殊到一般地提出问题。引导学生自主探索,尤其在形成新知生长点的时候,充分发挥分层教学法的优点,帮学有余力的发挥潜能,挖掘
潜能,在先行的基础上发挥他们“先学后教”(后教就是帮助老师教,当老师的助手,在过程中达到教学相长的功效),教师抽出精力帮助学习困难的学生,帮助有“怪问题”的学生。注重时间分配,尽量做到先学在当堂,同层竞赛在当堂,异层帮辅在当堂,练习探讨在当堂、激发兴趣在当堂。
在教学过程中,关注每一学生,让每一个学生都动起来,促成学生成为学习的主人,从而发挥学生的主体作用。
三、教学过程设计及说明
(一)情景导入:利用电子白板的幕布创设问题情境(插入背景音乐,增加形象性和趣味性):“一只青蛙1张嘴,2只眼睛4条腿,1声扑通跳下水。两只青蛙2张嘴,4只眼睛8条腿,2声扑通跳下水。三只青蛙3张嘴,6只眼睛12条腿,3声扑通跳下水。6767”,让学生把这首儿歌继续唱下去,唱几句即可,然后老师提问:在这首儿歌中假如有a只青蛙,那么请同学们思考一下,应该有多少张嘴,多少眼睛多少腿,以及多少声普通跳下水?问题设计具有一定的趣味性,引出可以用字母表示数。目的是激发学生的学习欲望,体现数学来源于实际生活,数学是从人的需要中产生这一认识的基本观点。
在这个过程中,尽量发挥不同层次学生的作用,体现出学生的自主学习、自我探讨、总结交流等主体性的过程。
(二)实验操作:用电子白板拉出问题。鼓励学生用火柴棒或木棒,按照“口”、“日”、“目”搭建正方形,然后填表,找规律。按照同层独立先竞争、异层小组后合作、全班交流分享的办法进行。
填写下表:
1在处理问题的过程中,充分抓住新知的生长点做文章,前四个空是铺垫,后一个空是新知生长点。对学有余力的学生,要求把100变成10000填空。这样做既培养了独立思考、勇于探索的能力,又培养了学生的帮扶意识和合作品质,还激发了学生的进取精神。
(三)问题解决和方法交流:按照小组交流和班级分享的办法进行。展示出想到的各种方法,小组推荐代表发言,鼓励学生对发言进行诊断评价,及时提醒学生注意发言、评价有无不妥,充分发挥教师平等中的首席作用。在这个过程中,还注意数学学习氛围的打造,保持教师刻意打造学习氛围的意识。
(四)随堂练习。分层次推出练习。设置三组,一是必做题2个;二是挑战题2个;三是攻坚题4个。设计时注重了层次,必做体现了保底;挑战和攻坚有层次的观注了个性差异。在同层之间进行竞赛性的统计,控制了学生思考的松紧度。
随堂练习的评价由先行的学生负责,教师给予适当的提醒。基本按照学生先做----代表评价-----教师适当帮助的步骤进行。
(五)课堂小结:主要通过学生回忆本节课所学内容,从内容、应用、数学思想方法、获取新知的途径方面先进行小结。教师尽量不补尾巴。以免形成学生总结时注意力不集中,教师总结才听的局面,在学生总结不全面可以给足时间让学生补充,真正当好平等中的首席。
(六)布置作业:内容略。
控制时间,尽量让学生当堂完成,不加重课后负担,不降低学习的积极性。ZfW152.CoM
四、设计追求的特色
在本节课的设计过程中,我注重把握了以下几点:
1.既研究了教法,也研究了学法,基本按照以学定教的思路进行设计。
2.重视了新知生长点,在新知生长点创造学生思考的问题,给足思考的空间。
3.注重了先学后教,而且尽可能让学有余力的学生去教,实现将带兵,兵促兵,兵教兵的局面。
4.发挥先进的教学手段如电子白板在教学中的辅助作用。
5.发挥学生的主体地位,摆正教师平等中的首席地位。
6.尽量做到课外不留作业,作业、练习分层安排,真正关注学生的个体差异。
7.注重创设学习氛围,激发兴趣,培养兴趣,巩固兴趣。
新版七年级英语上册课件【2】
Unit 1 Topic 3 How old are you ?
Section D
学习目标
1.学习以短文形式谈论姓名、年龄、学校、班级和电话号码等个人信息
2.能读懂短文并能从简单的名片中获得信息
3.能向大家做自我介绍
学习重点
以短文形式谈论姓名、年龄、学校、班级和电话号码
学习难点
第一人称和第三人称的转变
学习过程
(一)导入
(二)自学指导
1、预习课本P23 Part 1 ,复习书上的六个音标
2、预习课本P23 Part 2 ,分别找出Jane 和 Huang Hua 的个人信息
3、预习P23 Part 3 ,根据所给信息把空补充完整
4、背诵课本P24 Part 4a 4b
(三)问题导学 再看课本P22 Part 2 ,回答问题。
Where is Jane from ?__________________________
How old is she ?___________________________
What class is she in ? _____________________
Where is Huang Hua from ? _______________
What’s his English name ? _____________________
Are they in the same class ? ______________
(四)典题训练
(五)精讲点拨
1、They are not in the same class ,but they good friends.他们不在同一个班,但是他们是好朋友。
解析:same 意思是“相同的”,前面一定要用定冠词“the”,后面接单数名词。
but 意为“但是,可是”,起转折作用。
eg : We are in the same school ,but in different classes.我们在同一个学校,但是在不同的班级。
五.当堂检测
(一)用be动词的适当形式填空
1、---How old ________ you ?
2、----I ________ ten.3、---What _____ this ?-
4、---It _________ a pen.5、----Who ________ that ?
----She _________ Lucy.6、---What _________ these ?
----They ________ schoolbags.7、---__________ this a pen ?
----Yes , it _________.(二)单项选择
1.What’s that _______ Chinese ?
A、on B、in C、with
2.Is he ____________ English boy ?
A、a B、an C、the3、These are my _____________.A、book B、pens C、a friend4、---Is this your eraser ?----Yes ,____________.A、it is B、this is C、it’s5、They are not ________ the same class ,but they
are good friends.A、in B、on C、from
七、作业布置
(一)根据句意和首字母提示填空
1.They are in the s________ class.2、--How o________ is she ?---She is 15.3.Li Ming and Wang Fei are good f___________.4、I’m in a h_________ school.5、Is your p__________ number 3264-7853 ?
(二)选择填空
1、______ is Zhou Lan._________ phone number is 1358429764.A、Her , her B、She , her C、She , She2、What grade ______ your brother in ?
A、is B、am C、are3、---Is that a car ?---No ,____________
A、that isn’t B、that is C、it isn’t4、Nine and eleven is __________.A、thirteen B、fifteen C、twenty5、_________ are good friends.A、you ,he and I B、I ,you and he C、you and he ,I This is an English boy(男孩).His name is Jim.He is twelve.He is in my school.He and I are in the same grade.I’m in Class Three, Grade Seven, but he is in Class Four.I’m his good friend.He is my good friend, too.根据短文内容, 补全对话。
A: Excuse me, what’s his name?
B: His name is Jim.A: 6.______________________________
B: Yes.J-I-M, Jim.A: Where is he from?
B: 7.______________________________
A: How old is he?
B: 8.______________________________
A: Is he in your school?
B: 9.______________________________
A: Is he in Class Three, Grade Seven?
B: 10.______________________________
He is in Class Four, but he and I are good friends.A: Thank you.汉译英:1.布朗是他的姓氏。Brown is his ____ ____.12.那是一张地图吗
Is that ____ ____.13.它们是五辆公共汽车。
They are ____ ____.14.让我帮帮你吧。
Let ____ ____ you.15.给你。____ ____ are.(五)作业:请写一份自我介绍,内容包括姓名、年龄、国籍、班级、学校、电话号码。
七年级英语知识点
现在进行时态
概念:表示现在(说话瞬间)正在进行或发生的动作,也可以表示目前一段时间内或现阶段正在进行的活动。
结构:由be动词(am, is, are)+ 动词ing构成,其中be动词要与主语保持性数一致。
Mary is flying a kite in the park.玛丽正在公园里放风筝。
--What are you doing now? 你现在在干什么?
--I’m reading English.我正在读英语。
Are they drawing the pictures now? 他们正在画画吗?
动词现在分词是动词原形变化而来的,规则变化如下:
动词ing形式叫动词现在分词,其构成如下:
1)直接在动词后加ing
play—playing, do—doing, talk—talking, sing--singing
2)以不发音的字母e结尾的动词,先去e,再加ing
make—making, write—writing, have—having, take—taking
3)以重读闭音节结尾的动词且词尾只有一个辅音字母,应双写这个辅音字母,再加ing
run—running, stop—stopping, put—putting, swim—swimming
注意对现在进行时态的判断。判断一个英语句子用什么时态,主要看句子的时间状语,一般说来,每种时态都有与之相对应的时间状语。现在进行时表示现在(说话瞬间)正在进行或发生的动作。因此,这个时态最常用的时间状语是now;但有不少句子并没有now,只能通过提示语如look、listen等或者通过上下文来确定用现在进行时。
She is cleaning her room now.她正在打扫房间。
Look!The girl is dancing over there.看!那个女孩在那里跳舞。
--Can you go and play games with me? 你能和我们一起做游戏吗?
--Can’t you see I am doing my homework? 你没看见我正在做作业吗?
小编推荐
英语七年级上册课件范文
在教学过程中,老师教学的首要任务是备好教案课件,每个老师对于写教案课件都不陌生。教案是加强师生互动的重要方式。“英语七年级上册课件”之需求我们已经为您准备妥当,希望你更多关注本网站更新!

英语七年级上册课件 篇1
定语从句:
(一)基础:引导词---who, which, that, whom,练习1.I like cities___________are quiet and clean.2.I prefer students _________are hard-working.3.I hate TV shows _________ are noisy and boring.4.The music __________ is gentle and quiet attracts me a lot.5.The food __________tastes delicious is not always healthy.6.Those boys ___________ are playing basketballs over there are from Class Fifteen.7.The books ____________ are written by Lu Xun are worth reading.8.The town ___we visited last week is much larger than before.9.The book ___ he bought is very interesting.(二)特例:只用that的情况
1先行词被___________或___________所修饰,或本身是______________________时,只能用 that,2.被修饰的先行词为 ________________________________________________等不定代词时, 只能用 that.3.先行词被 _____________________________________________等词修饰时,只能用 that,而不用 which。
4.先行词里同时含有______________________,如I can remember well the persons and some pictures that I saw in the room.5.以______________________引导的特殊疑问句,只能用that.如: Who is the girl that is crying?
练习1.I am interested in everything___ is about the 2006 World Cup.2.Is there anything___I can do for you? 3.This is the very bike ______I lost
4.To my surprise, he gave me nothing __ I need.5.This is the best dictionary __ I have ever used.6.He was the first person _______passed the exam.7.He talked happily about the men and books________interested him greatly.(三)whose 1.The student ______father works in the factory is sitting there.2.I like the rooms ______windows face south.3.This is the desk ______legs were broken.4The woman ___ umbrella you took is angry about it.5.Here comes a girl ___ handwriting is the best.6The banana __skin is green can’t be eaten.7That tall tree _ leaves are yellow is very old.(四)从句谓语单复数由先行词确定,时态由从句时间状语决定,不必跟主句保持一致。
1-He is one of the boys who ____(doesn’t, don’t)finish doing homework.2-I like films which ____(be)exciting and interesting.3-Children who often ____(eat)junk food are easy to become fat and unhealthy.4-That boy who _____(run)fastest is from our class.5Those boys who ____ playing the guitar are from our school.(be)
6The trees which _____(be)watered yesterday belong to them.7The man who ____ over there is our teacher.(stand)8Those boys who ____ playing the guitar are from our school.(be)
9Mr.Brown is one of the foreign experts _______ _________(work)in China.10I’m one of the boys ______ ________(like)English best.(五)“介词+关系代词”注意: 介词的选用要考虑:
A.与先行词的搭配关系
1)I will never forget the day __________ I joined the army.2)I will never forget the days ______ I worked here.3)I will never forget the year ____________ my son went to college.B.与谓语动词的搭配习惯
1)Have you found the book ________I paid 29 dollars?
2)Have you found the book ________I spent 29 dollars?
3)Have you found the book _____________we learnt a lot?
4)Have you found the book _______she often talks?
关系副词的用法
练习:1.It must be a good place ________________we can do a lot of exercise.2.This is the village _________________we visited last week.3.The house _______ we live in is very big./ The house _______ we live is very big
4.The woman ___________ talked to you just now is a doctor.The woman ______ you talked to is my sister.The woman to ___________ you talked is my sister.5.This is the hospital ____________ I was born in.This is the hospital in _________I was born.This is the hospital____________ I was born.综合练习一.用适当的关系代词或关系副词填空
1.The boy ______ is wearing the black jacket is very clever.2.This is the present ____he gave me for my birthday.3.The man _______ talked to you just now is an engineer.4.He talked about the teachers and schools _______ he had visited.5.There is nothing in the world ______can frighten him.6.We visited a factory _______makes toys for children.7.Is this the place _______ your father once lived 8.I’ll never forget the days _______ I joined the League.9The car______my father bought last month is beautiful.10The man______hair is white is his grandfather.二()1.Rosa likes music ___ is quiet and gentle.A.when B.that C.where D.who
()2.--Is the girl _ is interviewing the manager of that company your friend--Yes, she is a journalist from CCTV.A.whom B.which C.who D.whose
()3 Yao Ming is a famous basketball star ___ is playing in the NBA.A.whose B.who C.what D.which
()4.The doctor ___I am waiting for is Mr.Smith.A.which B.whom C.whose D.why
()5.---Do you know Hong Zhanhui?---Yes.He’s the college student ____ has moved Chinese people a lot.A.who B.which C.what D.whom
()6.In my family, my sister is the only person __ loves chocolate.A.which B.who C.whom D.she
()7.This is the place ____ the old man lived last year.A.when B.where C.that D.which
()8.The song ___ Jay Zhou sings are popular with students.A.why B.whom C.what D.which
()9.The farmer was very thankful to the doctor ___ treated his son.A.what B.which C.who D.whose
()10.I like to live in a house__ is big and bright.A.that B.who C.how D.why
()11.The young lady ___ we met yesterday is our new math teacher.A.what B.whose C.whom D.which
()12.--Can you introduce the town to me?--OK.This is the town in __ I was born.A.that B.who C.which
()13.Miss green is the only person __ can help you with your English.A.she B.whom C.which D.who
()14.I like the second football match ___was held last week.A.which B.who C.that D./
()15.Is there anything ____ to you? A.that is belonged B.that belongs C.that belong D.which belongs
()16.I hate people ___ don’t help others when they are in trouble.A.who B.which C.they
()17.This is the only book ___I am looking for.A.that B.which C.who D.whom
()18 Her sister__ you met at my home was a teacher of English.A.whom B.that is C.which D.who is
()19 The book__is sold out at the moment.A.you need Bwhat you need C.which you need it D that you need it
()20 I'm one of the boys ______never late for school.A.that is B.who are C.who am D.who is
()21.__cleans the classroom can go home first.A.Anyone B.Those who C.However D.The one who
()22.The old man __yesterday is a scientist.A.I spoke B.I spoke to C.whom I spoke D.that I spoke to him
中考定语从句真题演练
1.---Is the girl __ is interviewing the manager of that company your friend?--Yes, she is a journalist from CCTV.A.whom B.which C.who D.whose
2.Do you still remember the movie _____ we saw last weekend? A.who B.what C.that D.whom
3.---Who is your new English teacher?---Elena, the woman ____ is wearing a red T-shirt over there.A.不填 B.whom C.whose D.who
4.Is that the man _____ helped us a lot after the earthquake? A.whose B.which C.when D.who
5.---What are you looking for?---I’m looking for the pen ___ I bought yesterday.A.who B.which C.whose
6.This is the novel_____ written by Guo Jingming.A.who B.what C.that D./
7.We should be ready to help the people ____ are in trouble.A.whose B.whom C.which D.who
8.Two years has passed, but Chinese people still remember those exciting days ____ they spent during the Beijing 2008 Olympic Games.A.that B.who C.when
9.The magician _____ played magic tricks in 2008 CCTV Spring Festival Gala is Liu Qian.He is popular in China now.A.whose B.who C.which
10.July likes music very much.She likes music ____ she can dance to.A.what B.who C.that
11.At school, you should do the things _____ are allowed by the teachers.A.that B.when C.what
12.Thought is the key _____ opens the doors of the world.A.why B.where C.which D.who
13.The gentlemen ___ are coming to my office tomorrow are my classmates many years ago.A.whom B.who C.those D.which
14.That’s the man _____ house was destroyed in the storm.A.that B.whose C.who D.which
15.The girl ____ I just talked with is Ben’s sister.A.whom B.which C.she
16.I love people ____ are friendly to others.A.which B.whose C.what D.who
17.It’s time to say goodbye to my school.I’ll always remember the people _____ have helped me.A.who B.what C.which D.where
18.I like the teacher ____ classes are very interesting and creative.A.which B.who C.what D.whose
19.Do you know the boy ____ is sitting next to Peter?---Yes.He is Peter’s friend.They are celebrating his ____ birthday.A.who, ninth B.that, nineth C./, nineth D.which, ninth
20.ShaolinTemple__lies in the west of Zhengzhou welcomes the visitors from abroad.A.where B.which C.who
二宾语从句
1宾语从句的学习要注意三个方面
第一:语序:在宾语从句中,一律用___________。
如Where does she live?(Do you know?)----Do you know where she lives?
***几个特殊的特殊疑问句
Which is the way to the nearest shop?/ What’s wrong with you?/ What’s up?/ What’s the matter?
这几个特殊疑问句本身就是陈述语序,在宾语从句中不需调整语序。
第二:时态;1)如果主句是___________,宾语从句时态根据实际情况而定.如:1.It’s going to rain.I think.---I think it’s going to rain.2.“I will go with you.” he says.---He says he will go with me.3.He studied English ten years ago.I know.I know he studied English ten years ago.2)主句是___________,宾语从句要用___________。
如:It’s going to rain.I thought.---I thought it was going to rain.“I will go with you.” he said.---He said he would go with me.3).若从句表达的是___________,规律,不管主句是什么时态,从句都用___________。
如1 The earth turns round the sun.The teacher told us---The teacher told us that the earth turns round the sun.Light travels much faster than sound.She said …---She said that light travels much faster than sound.第三:连接词1)如果被连接的句子是___________,那么连接词用___________,(也可省)
如1.He’ll be back in a month.(I hear…)I hear(that)he will be back in a month.2.I have been to the Great Wall once.(He tells me…)He tells me(that)he has been to the Great Wall once.2.)如果被连接的句子是___________,则用连接词___________
如:*Does he live in that house?(She asked me …)She asked me if/ whether he lived in that house.*Have you finished your homework?(I want to know…)I want to know if you have finished your homework.3)___________句,用原句中的特殊疑问词引导:what, who, where, when, which, why, how(many/ much/ often/ long/ old).如: Who are you waiting for? Can you tell me?---Can you tell me who you are waiting for?
What did he do yesterday? I don’t know.---I don’t know what he did yesterday.***其中 以wh-疑问词或how 引导的宾语从句与动词不定式可相互转换
如I don’t know what I can do.可以说成 I don’t know what to do.The policeman showed me where I could get books.可以说成The policeman showed me where to get books.Can you tell me how I can make a kite?可以说成 Can you tell me how to make a kite?
4).宾语从句___________。在_________________________________等动词所跟的宾语中,如果从句谓语是否定的,一般要将否定词not转移至主句谓语上去,而将从句谓语改为肯定形式。如:I don’t think he has time to play with the girl.二.综合练习
1.I want to know __
A.whom is she looking after B.whom she is looking C.whom is she looking D.whom she is looking after
2.I don't know _________ the day after tomorrow.
A.when does he come B.how will he come C.if he comes D.whether he'll come
3.Could you tell me _________ the nearest hospital is?A.what B.how C.whether D.where
4.Could you tell me _________ the radio without any help?
A.how did he mend B.what did he mend C.how he mended D.what he mended
5.I don't know if he____ tomorrow.If he _____,I'll tell you.
A.comes, comes B.will come, will come C.will come, comes es, will come
6.Do you know where _________ now?A.he lives B.does he live C.he lived D.did he live
7.Do you know what time ___?A.the train leave B.does the train leave C.will the train leave Dthe train leaves
8.I don't know _________ .Can you tell me,please? A.how the two players are old
B.how old are the two players C.the two players are how old D.how old the two players are
9.The small children don't know _________ . A.what is their stockings in
B.what is in their stockings C.where is their stockings in D.what in their stockings
10.I can't understand _________ . A.what does Christmas mean B.what Christmas does mean
C.what mean Christmas does D.what Christmas means.When the job______, let me know.A.do B.done C.is done D.finished.She asked me if I knew__.A.whose pen is it B.whose pen it was C whose pen it is D.whose pen was it 13.Miss Li wants to know _____________next week.A.when my uncle leaves
B.when will my uncle leave C.where my uncle will stay D.where does my uncle uld you tell me ________________with the money ? A.how to do B.what should I do C.how I should do D.what I should do
中考宾语从句真题演练
()1.Everyone can play an important role in the society.As members,we should try our best to do__.A.what we should do B.what should we do C.how we should do
()2.--I really hope to keep in touch with Lily.--Sorry.I don't know __.A.what her name is B.what her job is C.what her number is D.when she left
()3 —Can you tell me ______? —By doing more speaking.A how I will improve my English
B.which way can I choose C.how do I deal with my English D.what’s wrong with my English
()4.How lovely the dog is!Can you tell me _____?
A.where did you get it B.where will you get it C.where you got it
()5..--Excuse me, could you tell me ____ the book about aliens?--Sure, take the escalator to the second floor.A.where I can buy B.where can I buy C.when can I buy D.when I can buy
()6-“Do you know_ have our summer holiday?”-“Next week.”A.when will we B.when are weC.when we will
()7---Do you know ____ the MP4 yesterday?--Sorry, I’ve no idea about it.A.how much did he pay for B.how much he paid for C.he paid for how much D.he paid how much for
()8--What time will Mr.Brown be back to China?--Sorry.I don’t know ___.A.when did he go abroad B.why he is going abroad C.how soon will he be back Dhow long he will stay abroad
()9.You can’t image ___ when the pupils received these nice presents on Children’s Day.A.how they were excited B.how excited they were C.how excited were they D.they were how excited
()10.–Can you tell me ______?–She is in the computer lab.A.where Linda was B.where is Linda C.where was Linda D.where Linda
()11.–Do you know _______ the Capital Museum? –Next Friday.A.when will they visit B.when they will visit C.when did they visit D.when they visited
()12.He wanted to know____the English party.A.when will we have B.when we will have C.when would we have D.when we would have
()13.I want to know_______.A.when we should arrive at the airport B.when should we arrive at the airport
C.when the airport we should arrive at D.when the airport should we arrive at
()14.–David, look at the man in white over there.Can you tell me_______? –He is a doctor.A.who is he B.who he is C.what is he D.what he is
()15.–Do you know___the girl in red is? –I’m not sure.Maybe a teacher.A.when B.how C.where D.what
()16.Your T-shirt is so uld you tell me ________?
A.where you buy it B.where do you buy it C.where you bought it D.where did you buy it is
()17.I really want to know ____.A.what is wrong with my brother
B.how will he go to Beijing tomorrow C.if had he bought that car D.where did he go yesterday
()18.Excuse me, uld you tell me ?
A.where is the bank nearestB.where is the nearest bankC.where the nearest bank isD.the nearest bank is where
()19.Lily’s mother looked for her for half an hour, but couldn’t find ____.A.What Lily was.B.What was Lily C.Where Lily was D.Where was Lily
()20--Could you tell me___? He is wanted by the head teacher.--Sorry, I’ve no idea.But he _ here just now.
A.where Tim was, was B.where is Tim,was C.where Tim is,was D.where Tim is,is
三、状语从句:
一).条件状语从句:引导词为:if, unless。
形式:
主句_______________, 从句______________.练习:1.I am waiting for my friend.____________, I’ll do shopping alone.A.If she comes B.If she will come C.If she doesn’t come D.If she didn’t come
2.I am sure I can make it better, if our teacher _________me a second chance.A.give B.gave C.gives D.will give
3.The art club is for members only.You can’t go in___you are a member.A.unless B.Because C.if D.though
4.I ________the CDs to you if I have time tomorrow.A.will return B.returned C.have returned D.return
5.1)You won’t pass the final exam ___________(除非)you work hard.2)The children __________ climb the mountain if it __________________(不下雨)
3)_______________________if he comes.(给我打电话)
二)时间状语从句:(常见从属连词有when,before, after, until, as soon as, while…)
1)As soon as he _____in Paris, he will call you.A.arrive B.arrived C.arrives
2)Don’t leave until the rain_______.A.stopped B.stops C.stopping D.stop
3)You can go skating after you ____A.finish the job B.finished the job C.finishing the job
4)I’ll tell her the good news when he _____ back.A.came es e
5)Father was watching TV ________ Mum was washing dishes.A.before B.while C.after D.until
6)I was watching TV ____ you called me last night.A.when B.while C.until D.after
7)I ______ here since I came to China.d B.have lived C.am living D.had living
8).My grandma didn’t go to sleep______ I got back home.A.till B.until C.since D.when
三)原因状语从句:(常用连词有because, since, as)
1.Tom is ill at home, _____he can’t come here.A.so B.if C.because D.and
2.—Why did you come to school late this morning?--___I watched the Football World Cup until 12:00 last night.A.If B.Because C.Since D.Though
3.I hope to go to France some day__there are many museums there.A.though B.unless C.because D.where
四)结果状语从句:由so… that…/such…that/so that引导的从句(so后接形、副原级)
1)与too…to…句型的转换:
He ran so fast that I couldn’t catch up with him.=______________________________________________
The box is so heavy that I can’t carry it= ___________________________________________________
2)“so… that +从句”与“enough to”的替换
He’s so strong that he can carry the box.=___________________________________________________
He is not old enough to go to school.=________________________________________________________
3)so that…/ so…that…/such…that ____________________________________________________________
如:He got up early in the morning so that he could catch the early bus.The boy is so strong that he can lift up the heavy stone.He is such a clever boy that all of us like him.练习:1.--He was _______tired ______he fell asleep as soon as he lay down.--Oh, we can go out and let him have a good rest..A.too;to B.so;that C.enough;to D.such;that
2.There were _______many people ____I couldn’t find where she is.A.so;that B.so;as C.such;that D.as;that
3.He ran as fast as possible__he could reach school on time.A.in order to B so as to C such that D so that
4.They are ___interesting books __ I want to read them once more.A.so that B.such…that C.too…to D.so…that
综合练习
1.You may leave the classroom when you__writing.A.will finish Bare finishing C have finished Dhad finished
2.Would you give Johnny this letter if you ________ to see him this week.A.will happen B.happen C.are happened D.happened
3.She was busy, ____she couldn’t go to your birthday party last night.A.and B.so C.or D.but
4.English is ________ a useful language ________ it is spoken in many countries of the world.A.so…that B.such…that C.so…because D.such…because
5.Don’t cross the street __ the traffic lights are green.A.after B.until C.while D.since
6.Your dream won’t come true__ you know what your dream is.A.after B.unless C.while D.since
7.--Could you ask him if he __to my birthday party next Sunday? –I will, if I __ him this afternoon.es, meet B.will come, will meet es, will meet D.will come, meet
8.Sarah is ______ a hard-working girl ______ she often works late into night.A.so;that B.too;to C.such;that D.not only;but also
状语从句真题练习
1.—Where was your brother at this time last night?—He was writing an e-mail ___I was watching TV at home.A.as soon as B.after C.until D.while
2.The film “Kung Fu Panda” is___interesting__I would like to see it again.A.such,that B.too,to C.as,as D.so that
3.Tom will call me as soon as he ___home.A.gets B.has got C.got D.will get
4.We will have no water to drink___we don’t protect the earth.A.until B.before C.though D.if
5.We won’t start the meeting ___our teacher arrives.A.though B.until C.while D.or
6.Bob promises to join in the football match____he has to help his parents on the farm..A.if B.as C.unless D.when
7.___it’s difficult to make her dream come ture, she never gives up.A.Though B.Unless C.Because D.If
8.---Could you tell me when Mr.Li___in Huanggang?---Sure.When he ___, I’ll call you.A.arrives;will arrive B.will arrive;arrives C.arrives;arrives D.will arrive;will arrive
9.In summer, food goes bad easily__it is put in the refrigerator.A.until B.if C.unless
10.A moment, please.I’m checking if Mr.Smith__free tomorrow.A.is B.being C.to be D.will be
11.I didn’t go to bed __my mother came back late last night.A.so;B.until C.though
12.Hurry up,___you will miss the early train.A.or B.and C.if D.unless
13.---Tommy, do you know if Frank___to the theatre with us this Sunday if it ___?---Sorry, I have no idea.A.will go, is fine;B.goes, is fine C.will go, is going to be fine D.goes;will be fine
14.What a beautiful painting it is!I’ve never seen ___painting.A.such a B.a C.such D.this better
15.I don’t know __he will come tomorrow.___he comes, I’ll tell you.A.if, Whether B.whether, Whether C.if, That D.if, If
复合句综合检测
()1.Is this museum_ they visited last month? A.that B.where C.which D.the one
()2.Is that book ____ he borrowed on Friday? A.that B.which C.who D.the one
()3 The second book__I want to read is Business at the Speed of Thought.A.which B.what C.that D.as
()4 –Do you know the man __is running along the street? A who B which C whom
()5.Without friendship, one can’t be happy although he is rich enough.As for me, I will never forget the days ___I spent with my dearest friend.A that B when C who
()6 This is the best TV play __we have seen this year.A when B what C who D that
()7--Have you found the information about famous people ____you can use for report?
--Not yet.I’ll search some on the Internet.A which B who C what D whom
()8--Have you been to the Sports Center___ is just opened in town?--No, no yet.A where B who C that D when
()9--Bob, where do you work?--I work for a company ___sells cars.A which B where C what
()10____ have finished the work can leave.A.Those who B.Anyone C.The one who
()11.The building that ___new is our school.A.is B.are C.was D.were
()12.The pandas that we saved ____better now.A.are B.were C.is D.was
()13 This is the only thing _________ I have lost.A.which B.that C.where
()14.--Could you tell me____?--Sorry, I don’t know.I was not at the meeting.A.what does he say at the meeting.B what did he say at the meeting.C.what he says at the meeting D.what he said at the meeting
()15.No one can be sure____ in a million years.A.what man looks like B.what will man look like C.man will look like what D.what man will look like
()16.--Could you tell me ____?--She is a student in Eton School.A.where Kate is studying B.how Kate studies C.why Kate was studying D.when Kate studied
()17.--Could you tell me___ yesterday?--About two hours.A.How long it takes to fly to Guilin B.How long it took to fly to Guilin C.How long does it take to fly to Guiln D.How long did it take to fly to Guilin
()18.Please tell me____.A.what is wrong with the boy B.what is the boy wrong C.what wrong the boy is
()19.She will hate him when she _more about him.A.knowsB.know C.will know Dis going to know
()20.--Excuse me.Do you know_____?--Sorry, I don’t know.A.where is No.1 Middle School
B.where No.1 Middle School is C.No.1 Middle School is where D.No.1 Middle School where is
()21.At the science museum,the boys and girls get to know__________.A.what is the spaceship like
B.what the spaceship looks like C.how the spaceship looks 1ike D.how does the spaceship1ook like
()22.He didn’t tell me ____.A.which floor did he live on B.which floor he lived on C.which floor he lived D.he lived on which floor
()23.I’m new uld you tell me__, please?A.when does the first bus arrive B.when the first bus arrives
C.when did the first bus arrive D.when will the first bus arrive
()24.I wonder how long_______school?
A.has he been away from B.he has been away C.he has left D.he has been away from
()25.---We can use MSN to talk with each other on the Internet.---Really? Will you please show ____it? ‘
A.what to use B.how to use C.how can I use D.where can I use
()26.The teacher asked the students.A.if they were interested in chatting online
B.when was Albert Einstein born C.what they will do with the computers D.how often they go to movies
()27---Could you tell me how long __the book?--Three days.A.I can keep B.can I borrow C.I can borrow D.can I keep
()28.I can’t understand ___the boy alone at home.A.why she left B.did she leave C.why had she left D.why she leave
()29.You will not succeeded if you ______ harder.A.will work B.won’t work D.don’t work
()30.Write clearly __your teacher can understand you correctly.A.since B.for C.because Dso that
()31.______he failed , he went on doing the experiment.A.Even B.Yet C.Although D.in spite of
()32.The dog went out while we __ supper.A.had B.had had C.were having D.would have
()33.His brother has worked there ________ he left schoo A.when B.after C.since D.until
()34.The boy didn’t stop talking ____the second bell rang.A.when B.until C.after D.because
()35.__I came into the office, the teacher were having a meeting.A.While B.When C.Once D.Since
()36.I was about to leave my house __ the telephone rang.A.while B.as C.when D.since
七年级上册英语人教版篇一:人教版英语+七年级上册各单元知识点详解
StarterUnit1Goodmorning.1.Goodmorning/afternoon/evening早上(上午)/下午/晚上好。答语相同。在熟人或家人之间可省略good.熟人之间的问候可加上称呼语,称呼语放在问候语之后且用逗号隔开。如:Goodmorning,class!同学们,早上好!△Goodnight!晚安(晚间告别用语)2.Hello,Frank!你好,弗兰克。
3.A;Ho上午pm下午cm厘米mm毫米11.英语句子的书写
句子开头的第一个单词的第一个字母要大写,单词与单词之间要有适当的距离,一般为放入一个字母的空隙,句末要有标点符号,英语的句号是个实心圆点,而不是汉语中的小圆圈。12.大写字母的用法
1)英语句子开头的第一个字母必须大写。
2)I(我),OK在句中任何位置都大写。
3)人名、地名、国名、某国人或某种语言等专有名词的第一个字母必须大写。
4)电影名、书名、报刊、文章的标题等中的每个实词(如:名词、动词、形容词、副词、数词)的第一个字母一般大写。EnglishWeekly《英语周报》Titanic《泰坦尼克号》5)表示月份、星期、重要节日的名词的第一个字母必须大写。6)某些缩略词的第一个字母都必须大写。
7)表示称呼的名词的第一个字母通常要大写。UncleWang王叔叔
14.英语句子成分
一、主语(subject):句子说明的人或事物。
1.Thesunrisesintheeast.太阳从东方升起。(名词)2.Helikesdancing.他喜欢跳舞。(代词)
3.Tovie去看电影
2、助动词do/does的用法。
3、Whatkind(of)用来问种类:Whatkind(ofmovie)doyoulike?
4、too,ase你的名字firstname名字lastname姓氏hername她的名字
telephone/phonenumber电话号码inChina在中国
2.必背典句:
1.—nicetomeetyou!见到你很高兴!
—Nicetomeetyou,too.见到你我也很高兴。
2.—What’syourname?你的名字是什么?
—Alan.艾伦
3.I’mJenny我是珍妮。
4.What’shis/hername?他的/她的名字是什么?
5.Hername’sMary.她的名字是玛丽。
6.What’syourfirst/lastname?你的名字/姓氏是什么?
7.—What’shistelephonenumber?他的电话号码是多少?
—It’s876-9548是876-9548.3.形容词性物主代词
物主代词是表示所有关系的代词,是人称代词的属格形式。它分第一人称、第二人称和第三
人称,每个人称又分单数和复数。物主代词分形容词性物主代词和名词性物主代词。
形容词性物主代词的用法和形容词的用法相似,具有形容词的性质。在句中作定语,(转载于:eC.myD.mine
(2011年河北)Georgereadsthenewspapereverymorning.That’shabit.A.heB.himC.hisD.himself
(四川南充中考)SheisastudentandnameisKate.A.sheB.herC.hers
4.be动词用法
(1)be动词(am,is,are)这三个动词常用做连系动词,在句子中起连接主语和表语的作用。
Thisismymother.这是我的妈妈。
Iamnine.我九岁了。
Youaremygoodfriend.你是我的好朋友。
(2)be动词三种形式的使用主要取决于主语。主语是第一人称I(我)时,用am,主语是第二
人称you(你,你们)或名词及代词的复数时,用are,主语是第三人称单数it/he/she(它/
他/她)或名词及代词单数时,用is.(3)am,is,are的意思是“是”,但不能处处翻译成“是”。例,Howareyou?你好吗?
5.What引导的特殊疑问句
英语中用于提出疑问的句子叫疑问句,以what等特殊疑问词开头的句子叫特殊疑问句,用
法如下:
(1)询问姓名,—What’syourname?你的名字是什么?—Alan.艾伦。
(2)询问某物用英语怎么说。—What’sthisinEnglish?—It’satelephone.这是一部电话。
(3)询问电话号码。—What’syourtelephone/phonenumber?你的电话号码是多少?
—It’s563-4789.是5634789.6.基数词的用法。
数词分为两大类:基数词和序数词,表示“多少”的为基数词;表示“第几”的为序数词。
基数词有zero,one,two等。序数词我们刚学了一个“first”(第一)。其中基数词的用法如下:
(1)表示数字、年龄、日期等,在剧中可作主语、定语和表语。—What’stwoandfive?二加上五等于几?
—Seven七(表示数字)
—Howoldisit?它几岁了?
—It’sfour.它四岁了。(表示年龄)
—What’sthedatetoday?今天几月几日?
—It’sOctober3.10月3日。(表示日期)
(2)表示编号:LessonOne第一课UnitOne第一单元
(3)表示号码,如电话号码、门牌号、身份证号等,按单个基数词读出。0可以读成字母o的读音或zero,相连的相同两位数可以读成double(双写的)+基数词。
(4)表示时刻:8::00=eighto’clock8点钟
7.汉语名字在英语中的写法
中国人名是姓在前,名在后。姓和名的首字母都要大写且中间空一格,若名为两个字,中间
不加空格,只需第一字的首字母大写。ZhangLing张玲LiuYifei刘亦菲
英语七年级上册课件 篇2
人教版英语七年级上册Unit7 How much are these socks? Section A 1a-1c说课稿
新堡初级中学
石勇亮
一、教材分析
1.教材的地位、作用及前后联系:
新目标英语七年级上册第7单元第一课时(1a-1c)。
话题:询问价格,贴近学生的日常生活。
与Starter Unit3辨认颜色以及Unit 6谈论好恶联系紧密,学习询问价格的同时可以复习巩固之前的知识。
2.教学内容:
课题:How much are these socks ? 话题:“ask about prices”。目标语言:
--How much is „?
--it’s„
--How much are „?
--They are„
3.教学目标 ①知识目标
词汇:socks
shorts sweater trousers
jacket
skirt 句型:--How much is this T-shirt?
--It’s seven dollars.--How much are these socks?
--They are two dollars..②能力目标:掌握用how much„句型来询问价格,让学生能够利用简单的英语进行购物,培养学生的听说读写能力。③情感目标:
(1)树立正确的消费观念,养成节约用钱的生活习惯;(2)知道人民币与美元的差别,了解中西方的文化差异。4.教学重点与难点
我把名词单复数的应用和如何在现实生活中询问东西的价格确定为本节课的重点与难点。为了突破难点,教学中利用了大量的图片、实物,给学生提供非常直观的感性认识。
二、学情分析
农村学生学英语起步晚,怕犯错。在教学中努力营造宽松、民主、和谐的教学氛围,积极鼓励他们大胆尝试,保护他们的自尊心和积极性。抓住七年级学生活泼、好动、好胜心强的特点,引进小组竞争机制,倡导其参与活动。
三、教法分析
1、情景引入法:利用多媒体创设情景,引入新知。吸引学生注意力,使他们对即将学习的新知识产生好奇。
2、听说法:对目标语言进行反复操练,以达到灵活运用的目的。
3、任务型教学法:设计一系列的任务活动,让学生在完成任务的过程中掌握目标语言。
四、学法分析 1.分组合作学习。2.“为用而学,用中学,学了就用”:本课时的目标语言是询问事物的价格,与学生实际生活联系紧密,所以应该充分利用创造的情景和实物给与学生练习英语口语的机会。
五、教学过程设计
Step1、Warm up and Lead in:
1、创设情境,引入新单词
socks shorts sweater T-shirt trousers jacket
skirt
2、复习学过的句型
What’s this ∕that in English?
What color is it?
3、注意名词的单复数 a pair of trousers/shorts/socks two pairs of trousers/shorts/socks Step2、练习、巩固新单词,完成活动1a、1b Step3、教授、练习新句型,完成活动1C
将dollar与人民币单位yuan相比较,注意dollar的单复数变化。
此环节中结合图片设计师生对话、结对活动、句子接龙等任务,让学生分小组竞赛,练习巩固新句型。在练习的过程中,将重点句型How much is it?发散为How much are they?重点掌握单复数在此句型中的变化。Step4.综合运用
How much is that red hat? It’s 6 dollars.How much are your white trousers?
They are 10 dollars.加大句子难度继续操练,巩固新词汇和句型。
此环节将表示颜色的形容词带入操练句型中,并结合学生穿的毛衣、裤子、身边的尺子、书包、铅笔、橡皮擦擦等物品让学生自己编对话。Step5、总结回顾 词汇:sock
T-shirt
shorts
sweater
trousers
shoe skirt
dollar
2、句型:--How much is this T-shirt?
--It’s 7 dollars.--How much are these socks?--they are 2 dollars.Homework: Ask about prices of your deskmate’s clothing, and write down your conversations.询问你同桌衣物的价格,并将你们的对话写下来。Step6、板书设计
Unit 4 How much are these socks?
(Section A
1a – 1c)Clothing
jacket
A: How much is this T-shirt? a pair of socks
B: It’s seven dollars.two pairs of trousers
A: How much are these socks? Shorts shoes skirt sweater
B: They are two dollars.
英语七年级上册课件 篇3
有的学生对小学英语比较重视,学得很好;但有的学生或学校不重视,学得很不好,还有几个甚至完全没有学过。有的学生笔试不错,但语音、语调、书写都有待加强。因此,整个班级的英语水平很不平衡,给日常教学带来诸多的不便,提高了难度。
学生刚刚从小学进入初中,处于一个衔接的阶段,学习任务加重,学习的习惯不是很好,没有形成一定的适合自己的方法,都有待改善。
总之,既要避免好生吃不饱的现象,又要努力把目前英语有欠缺的学生拉上去,激发他们的兴趣和信心,赶上中上的水平学生。在今后的教学中应该注重培养、激发兴趣,教给学生学习的方法,从学生的学习兴趣、学习能力、生活经验和认知水平出发,倡导体验、实践、参与与交流的学习方式和任务型的教学途径,发展学生的综合语言运用能力,使语言的学习过程成为学生形成积极的情感态度、主动思维和大胆实践、提高跨文化意识和形成学生自主学习能力的过程,这是新课标和新目标英语的要求。
The goal:
The goal of Go for it is to make language a step-by-step progression that builds confidence and leads to open-ended activities where students can actively relate learning to their personal lives.
Go For It! 是以《英语课程标准》为依据,以学生的英语语言综合运用能力为目标。不仅以语言知识、语言技能为重点,而且更注重学生的学习策略、情感态度和文化意识。教学内容的处理和取舍灵活开放, 只要教师从学生的实际水平和语言能力出发,任何教学内容的调整或取舍,任何教学步骤的安排都是可行的。“I sometimes go to the last to do the group work first…It depends on the teachers’ knowledge of the students actual language ability…”(David Nunan);提倡教师结合学生实际,充分利用学生、教师本身和环境中一切可以利用的资源,丰富教学内容,创造运用英语的机会,注意多渠道开发教学资源。 “Don’t use just the textbook. Anything in real life that connect and appropriate to the lesson can be used as teaching resources.”(David Nunan);提倡任务型语言教学,教学进度整体把握,教学形式不拘一格;课堂以学生为主体,以任务为主线,重视体验参与,课后访谈调查,读写扎记,重视语言运用;正视个体差异,倡导过程激励,以多层次、多角度、多主体的结果与过程并重的评价方式激励进步。
The key points of each unit:
U 1 Making new friends Introduce yourself
Ask for and give telephone numbers Present tense to be
Prossessive adjectives:my,your,his,her
Identify ownerships Demonstratives:this,that
What questions and Yes/No questions
How do you spell pen?
Identify people Demonstratives:these,those
U4 Things around the house Talk about where things are Where questions and Yes/No questions
U5 Spending time with friends Ask and answer questions about ownership
Make suggestions Present tense to have
Yes/No questions and short answers: let’s
Food Talk about likes and dislikes Present tense to like
Yes/No questions and short answers
Affirmative and negative statements
Thank someone Demonstratives:this,that,these,those
Dates Talk about dates When questions
Prossessive “s”
Make plans Present tense to want
Yes/No questions and short answers:
U10 Joining a club Talk about abilities Modal verb can
Yes/No questions and short answers:
Affirmative and negative statements
U11 Daily routines Talk about daily routines
Ask about and say times When questions
What time is it?
U 12 School subjects Talk about preferences
新目标任务型教学的特色理念:《新目标英语》是以任务为基础的语言教学,在教材的设计上,遵循了自然言语、情境真实性、语言形式为交流功能性服务、层层深入阶梯型发展语言能力、在做中学等最新教学原则和理念,注重引导学生体会文化差异,培养学生自主学习能力,完全符合教育部的《义务教育阶段英语课程标准》的要求。本教材的教学理念:“知识用于行动”,强调“语言应用”,培养“创新、实践能力”,发展“学习策略”。
人教社《新目标英语》教材的.几大特色:
A. 图文并茂。一幅副充满情趣,幽默生动的画面,令你眼睛一亮。它不仅版面设计充满新意,而且在内容和结构方面更富有创意 更具时代感,更有现代气息,更加贴近学生的生活。学生一拿到课本后都爱不释手,迫不及待地翻阅。
B. 实用性强。每个单元的选材都来源于学生的学习和生活。紧紧地与学生的年龄特征、认知结构、生活经验联系在一起。如第一册的十四个话题:认识新朋友、教室里的物品、家庭成员、食品、购物、电影、参加社团、生活习惯、学习科目、国家与语言。第二册的十二个话题:邻居、动物、足球、职业、周末活动、音乐、人物性格与外貌、天气、节日、度假与休闲、流行文化、规章制度与日常生活。由于这些都是学生熟悉的话题,生活中经常碰到的事情,所以学生容易接受,学习热情自然也高。使教学活动由“要我学”转变为“我要学”。
C.注重交际。针对中国学生学英语普遍存在的“聋哑病”,教材设计了大量的听说读写材料。每个单元都有语言活动,且内容不同,形式多样,学生对这些活动充满兴趣,所以大家都能情绪高昂地参加pair work, group work, games等活动。学生们充满了自信,开心地练习说英语,教室里常常充满了欢歌笑语。同学们都喜欢上英语课,他们能为学以致用而感到兴奋,同时也体验到了学习语言的快乐。
D.词汇量大。第一册有词汇700个左右,第二册约450个,第三册约450个,第四册约400个, 第五册约500个,合计2500个。这一点正好达到《英语课程标准》5级的要求。大大丰富了学生的词汇量,让学生能更好地表达自己的所思所想。同时也要求学生必须采取有效的记忆单词的方法,就会事半功倍,否则难以适应教材的要求。这时学生特别需要教师的指导 .。
a.言语、情境真实性原则 (The authenticity principle)
任务的设计要提供给学习者明确、真实的语言信息。语言情境、语言形式等要符合交际的功能和规律。使学习者在一种自然、真实或模拟真实的情境中体会语言、掌握语言的应用。
b.形式-功能性原则 (The form-function principle)
任务的设计注重语言形式和语言功能的结合。形式-功能性原则,旨在使学习者掌握语言形式的同时,培养其自我把握语言功能的能力;每一阶段任务的设计都具有一定的导入性,学生在学习语言形式的基础上,通过系列任务的训练,能够自己进行推理和演绎,从而理解语言的功能,并在交际中进行真实运用。
c.阶梯型任务原则 (The task dependency principle)
学习单元中任务的设计由简到繁,由易到难,层层深入,并形成由初级任务到高级任务并由高级任务涵盖初级任务的循环。在语言技能方面,遵循先听、读,后说、写的设计顺序,使教学阶梯式地层层递进。
自始至终引导学生通过完成具体的任务活动来学习语言,让学生为了特定的学习目的去实施特定的语言行动,通过完成特定的交际任务来获得和积累相应的学习经验。
1.利用直观教具和教学辅助媒体,激发兴趣,增加容量,整体优化课堂教学。
2.每日进行单词竞赛。
3.学唱英文歌。
4.坚持值日生报告。
Week 2 Starter Unit 2& Starter Unit 3 5课时
英语七年级上册课件 篇4
Unit 4 Where’s my schoolbag?说课稿 第一课时(Section A 1a-1c)
说课教师 :Crystal 大家好!
今天我说课的内容是人教版新目标英语七年级上册的第四单元Unit 4 Where’s my schoolbag?下面,我将从以下几个方面进行说课。
一、说教材
本单元主要内容是谈论物品的位置。通过询问物品的位置,学生们将学习一些有关家居物品的单词,以及on、in、under等方位介词的用法,学习并掌握where引导的特殊疑问句及其答语。学习人称代词they的用法。使学生学会基本句型“Where’s/ Where’re..? It’s/ They’re on/in/under...”学会运用方位介词“on/in/under”来表达物品的位置。通过以上的学习,使学生学会运用听关键词、推测词意的学习策略,识别不同物品的位置。这样既能让学生了解自己的家居环境,热爱自己的家,又能促使学生通过想象来设计自己理想中的房间和对好的生活习惯的重新认识。
二、说学情
本课的对象是刚进初中不久的七年级新生,他们好动、好奇、好表现,有部分学生小学并没有学过英语,他们对英语有着极大的兴趣和好奇心。教师应该抓住这个有利因素,注重对学生学习英语兴趣的培养,保持他们强烈的好奇心和旺盛的求知欲。因此,教师在教学过程中要精心设计各种教学活动,积极采用新颖、丰富多彩的教学手段来激发学生的学习兴趣,用兴趣来激活他们的思维能力,唤起他们的学习注意力,进而充分调动学生的学习积极性和主动性,让他们积极参与到教学中去。另一方面要创造条件和机会,让学生有机会表现自己,享受成功的喜悦,从而增强他们对英语学习的自信心,在学习过程中发展综合语言应用能力。让他们真正成为一堂课的主人。七年级英语教学是整个初中英语教学的基础,让学生迈好英语学习的第一步,对培养学生学习英语的能力和促进学生的个性发展有着很大的帮助。
三、说教学目标 知识目标:
1、学习和掌握有关询问物品位置的句型:
Where’s my schoolbag? It’s on/in/under/behind/next to the chair.2、学习和掌握有关家具类的单词:table, bed, bookcase, keys,books , sofa ,chair ,schoolbag
3、学会三个方位介词的用法:on ,in , under 能力目标:学会询问物品的位置和确认物品的位置;能够运用所学知识进行简单的会话。
情感目标:培养爱整洁的习惯和帮助他人的优良品德。
四、说教学重难点 重点:
1、熟练拼写和运用家居物品名称:where, table, chair, bed, bookcase, sofa, chair, on, under等词。
2、通过使用方位介词“on/in/under”表达物品的位置及学习“Where……”和“It’s……的用法,使学生学会运用特殊疑问句和陈述句。难点:
Where问句和方位介词on,in,under的用法。
五、说教法
在整个教学过程中我采用情景教学法、多媒体辅助教学法、合作学习法、小组竞赛法、交际法和任务驱动式教学法等教学方法进行教学。通过设置一些情景,让学生自己完成任务来学习知识、掌握技能。这种方法对于培养学生分析问题、解决问题的能力,激发和维持学生的学习积极性等有着独特的优势。因此,在教学过程中,我所要求学生掌握的内容都是通过一个个任务来进行,由易到难,由简到繁,让学生在不知不觉完成任务的过程中学到知识以兴趣吸引人,以情感培育人,以评价激励人、以活动促进人。
六、说教学过程 Step1.Warming up T:Good morning, everyone!Ss: Good morning,Miss Zhan!T:How are you today? Ss: Fine, thinks.And you? T:I’m fine, too.Step2:Lead in Now, look at me.What’s this in English? Ss: It’s a pen.T:Very good.together, read twice.Step3:Teach the new words 通过图片展示来学习新单词,同时引出句型“Where’s my schoolbag? It’s…” T:Where’s the schoolbag? Ss:It’s under the table?(引导学生回答)T: Where’s the pencil box? Ss: It’s on the desk.T: Where’s the baseball? Ss: It’s in the drawer.根据1a图,引出复数句型。Where are …? They’re …? T:Where are the books ? Ss:They’re on the sofa ?(引导学生回答)T: Where are the keys? Ss:They’ re on the table.接着板书呈现句型,让学生对比这两个单复数句型的用法。Step4:Listening Practice 1b 播放1b部分的录音让学生听,引导学生写出所听到的单词的号码,完成1b部分的听力任务。Step5: Pair work 让学生小组合作共同探究完成1c部分口语交际的教学任务,学会运用“Where’s my schoolbag? It’s under the chair.” 的对话及方位介词“on/in/under/behind”目标句型来表达物品的位置。Step6: Guess Game 设计一个猜谜游戏,比如把不同的物体放在不同的位置,让学生来猜,在找寻物体的过程中来巩固今天所学的内容。Step7:Summary 教师带着学生总结本课重点学习了哪些词汇、句型。Step8:Homework 1.画出自己的小房间,为其中的物品标上英文,物品越多越好。2.抄写新单词和重点句型。
板书设计:
Unit4 Where‘s my schoolbag?
Word: Sentences:
table chair bed Where‘s my schoolbag? It’s under the chair.Sofa clock tape Where is his pencil? It is in his schoolbag.Desk pencil Where are the keys? Ss:They’ re on the table.where schoolbag Where are my books on in under behind.? They’re on the sofa
英语七年级上册课件 篇5
Unit 4 Where's my schoolbag?
Section A 1a1c
Words Sentences
chair
sofa
bed
table
bookcase
... —Where's my schoolbag?
—It's under the table.
—Where are my books?
—They're on the sofa.
(整洁和有条理的板书设计,有利于学生对本课知识有一个系统性的认识,同时培养学生有条理和爱整洁的习惯。)
备课资料
知识讲解
1.—Where's my schoolbag?我的书包在哪里?
—It's under the table.在桌子下面。
★这是一个由疑问副词Where引导的特殊疑问句。where “在哪里、哪儿”,通常用来询问某人或某物在什么地方。对于特殊疑问句,我们不能用“Yes”和“No”回答,而要用一个陈述句或短语来作出明确的回答。例如:
—Where's Tom?汤姆在哪儿?
—He is here.他在这儿。
2.介词 on、in 和under
★1)on表示表面上的接触,一个在另一个的上面,即“在……的上面”。
如:An apple is on the table.苹果在桌子上。
Are his keys on the chair?他的钥匙在椅子上吗?
2)in表示“在……里”,无论在大的范围内还是在小的范围内,都要用in。
如:—Where is your eraser?你的橡皮在哪里?
—It's in my pencil box.在我的铅笔盒里。
The book is in your schoolbag.那本书在你的书包里。
3)under表示“在……下”,指在某物垂直的下方。
如:The baseball is under the desk.棒球在桌子下面。
A chair is under the tree.一把椅子在树下。
★介词短语是由“介词+(冠词)+名词”组成的短语,有特定的意义,可以在句中作定语修饰名词,也可以在句中作状语修饰动词。本单元出现的是作状语的介词短语。如:
on the desk/floor/wall/hill/tree/playground/bed/bike 在桌子/地板/墙/山/树/操场/床/自行车上
★介词表示方位时,不要忘掉系动词“be”。
英语七年级上册课件 篇6
知识目标:
(1)复习Wh-questions。
(2)学生收集朋友的有关信息特别是人物的外貌描写。
(3)学生能用不同的句型来介绍个人信息,如:My…’snameis…;His/Her favourite hobbyis…;He/She is…years old,…centimetershigh.He/She lives in…etc。
技能目标:(1)听说――学生能从听力中抓住描述人物的信息。(2)写――学生能把听到的信息正确地填入表格。
I Sing a song.
II.Duty report(Ask the students some Wh-questions about the duty reporter)
1.Get ready for the listening.
Pay attention to the words:length n.长度,height n.高度,birth n.出生,blond adj.金色的.
2.Explain how to do the two parts of the listening.
A.Fill in the blanks in the table for the first time to listen.
B.Write the numbers 1-4 under the correct photos for the second time to listen.
3.Read the dialogues after finishing the listening.Pay attention to the Wh-questions.
IV.Practice in pairs.
1.Practice the dialogues in pairs.
You:What colour is your hair?
Your deskmate:It’s_________(brown).
You:How long is your hair?
Yourdeskmate:It’s_________(very long).
You:What colour are your eyes?
Yourdeskmate:_____________(Brown).
Yourdeskmate:I’m___________(155)cmtall.
Yourdeskmate:I am from_________(theUK).
You:What’s your favourite sport?
Yourdeskmate:_____________(Tennis).
You:What’s your best subject?
2.Then fill in the information in the table.
3.Introduce your deskmate to the class
My deskmate is______________.He/She is____________.
He/She has________________hairand___________eyes.
His/Her favourite hobby is____________
His/Her best subject is_____________.
And he/she wants to be_____________.
Describe one of your favorite teachers in our school!
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
英语七年级上册课件 篇7
七年级上册英语Unit7第一课时教学设计
宜君县第二中学 王娟
一、设计思路
本节课教授的词汇主要是服饰类的,课型属于听说课。所以在课前先营造一种轻松的学习氛围,教唱一首英语歌曲,让学生尽快地融入进课堂,期间还有pair work,groupwork,把学生分成两两小组或四人小组,互相对话。这样的活动要进行两次,可以提供给学生充分的时间进行交流。
二、教材分析
本节课是第七单元的第一课时,学生在前一单元初步学习完有关食物的英语知识之后,进一步地在本单元学习有关服饰的知识。而本课时是第一课时,所授的知识点应该浅显易懂,不应该太难。本课时围绕着几个关于服饰的词汇和两个询问价钱的句型展开。
三、教学目标
(一)教学知识点
(1)New words:T-shirt,sweater,bag,hat,skirt,socks,shorts,pants,shoes,(2)Questions and answers:How much is/are…?It’s/They are…dollars.(二)能力训练要求
(1)通过师生对话,生生对话等一系列活动,提高学生实际运用英语的能力。(2)体会合作学习所带来的快乐。
(三)情感与价值观要求
通过学生互相帮助,互相学习,体验集体荣誉感和成就感,发展合作精神。
四、教学重点和难点 重点:
(1)学会重点词汇的发音,单复数形式的掌握。(2)学会询问价钱的英语句型及其回答。难点:
(1)表示大小,颜色的形容词同时出现在名词前时,该如何摆放。(2)听力2a前,如何充分铺垫,以便于学生跟上录音速度。
五、教学策略与手段(1)师生对话,生生对话。(2)充分运用现代教育技术手段。
六、教学过程
(一)、课前热身:教唱英语歌曲 color song Who is wearing yellow today?
yellow today, yellow today Who is wearing yellow today?
yellow today.Who is wearing red today?
red today, red today Who is wearing red today?
red today Who is wearing green today?
green today, green today Who is wearing green today?
green today Who is wearing blue today?
blue today, blue today Who is wearing blue today?
blue today Who is wearing black today?
black today, black today Who is wearing black today?
black today Who is wearing white today?
white today, white today Who is wearing white today?
white today Who is wearing pink today?
pink today, pink today Who is wearing pink today?
pink today 设计意图:为了给学生营造一种轻松愉快的学习氛围,尽快融入到所教知识中去,也可以为接下来的颜色的教学作铺垫。
(二)、导入新课:
(1)媒体图片,教授学生新单词。T-shirt,sweater,bag,hat,skirt,socks,shorts,pants,shoes,然后完成书本P41的活动1a.设计意图:这一步是为了让学生为接下来的口语活动打下基础,有话可说。
(2)生走进一家虚拟的服装店,让学生根据所学单词,进行结对活动,学会提问:How much is/are…? 以及回答:It’s/They’re…dollars.设计意图:目的是给学生创设半真实的情景,在这样的情景下呈现新的句型能让学生更容易理解和接受。在结对活动之前,先让个别学生操练重点句型以作示范,以使全班同学都能理解并准确地操练新的语言点。
3(3)卡片教授颜色:red,green,yellow,orange,white,black,blue…
设计意图:为了教会学生用一个或多个形容词来描述物品,使其语言更加丰富。
(4)服饰大调查: ①以四人一组为单位,对本组同学所穿服装颜色和价格进行问答② 根据回答做记录并填好表格;③挑选几位同学向全班汇报记录的情况。
设计意图:在一堂课结束的时候安排这么一个活动,目的是让学生把本堂课学过的知识点串联起来,能使他们更加自由地交谈,并且有更多地时间运用所学的新单词,新句型进行对话,通过观察还能提高他们的审美观。
(三)、课堂小结
(1)今天这堂课你学到了什么?(2)你有那些收获?请同学们谈谈。
(四)、课后作业:两人或三人合作编一个在商店购物的对话.
英语七年级上册课件实用
英语七年级上册课件 篇1
一.单元分析
本单元以家庭为话题,以家庭介绍为任务学习That’s my sister. These are my brothers. Who is she?等句型的使用。要求学生能够做到:
1.运用这些句型向别人介绍某人的能力和与人交际的能力;
2.能向别人介绍自己的家庭情况;
3.在珍视自己的家庭,珍爱亲情的同时,关心不幸家庭的同学,对他们做力所能及的帮助。
二.学情分析
学生在小学中已经学习过一些家庭成员称呼的知识,对于一些简单的称谓表达没有问题,但书写仍然是有问题的。同时,由于中西方文化的差异,中国家庭中的一些关系可能不好表达,老师需要做必要的补充。
另外,由于计划生育政策的施行,同学们的兄弟姐妹少了,这对于brother, sister的概念的表达可能有些不利。但是,中国是一个注重家庭的国家,本单元的学习会让学生了解不同国家的家庭结构间的不同。同时由于班级内可能有来自单亲家庭的同学,在授课时要注意保护学生,不要伤及学生的自尊,同时要注意培养学生的移情能力。
三.课时安排
四课时
四.教学过程
Period 1 (A1, 3a, B3)
I. Teaching Objectives
1. Knowledge Objectives:
(1) Expressions: sister, mother, father, parent, brother, grandmother, grandfather, grandparent, family, those, who, oh, these, those, they.
(uncle, aunt, cousin, niece, nephew, here, photo )
(2) Structure: That’s my family. Those are my parents. Who’s she? She’s my sister. Oh, and these are my brothers.
3) Grammar: The plural forms of the demonstrative pronouns.
2. Ability Objectives:
(1) Learn how to introduce the family.
(2) Get Ss to know the names of the various members of a family.
3. Moral Objectives: Father and mother, I love you!
II. Teaching Importance(focus)
(1) Learn how to introduce the family.
(2) Get Ss to know the names of the various members of a family.
(3) Get Ss to know the differences between this/that is and these/those are.
(4) Get Ss to know who questions
III. Teaching Difficulties
1. 因为单复数的问题,学生对this与these,that与those的转换可能会弄错,
2. 在拼写时,学生习惯把mother写成monther。
3. grandmother,grandfather中d不发音。
Ⅳ. Teaching Aids
A recorder, multi-media
Ⅴ. Teaching Procedure:
Step l:Lead in
Enjoy an English song called the Finger Family, do daily greetings as usual.
Step 2: Pre-task
1. T: Today I’ll introduce a new friend.
Then show a picture of a boy to teacher new words about family members.
2. Work on 1a, match the words.
3. Listening practice: Do A 1b, first listen and circle the words, then imitate.
4. Look at the picture on SB P7, ask and answer in pairs.
Step 3:While-task
Photo show. 1.T ask and S answer
2. Ss ask and answer in pairs. Then Do A3a
3. Make a short passage about the photo. Then Do B 2b.
step 4:Post-task
Draw a photo of family and write about it, then share with friends.
Step 4. Sum up
Do exercises in class and check the answers
Homework
1.完成2号本P14-15 第一课时
2. 预习Unit 2 第二课时
3. 完成 Self check 2
4. 常规听读,听写作业
Layout of Bb
Unit 2 This is my sister. Period 1
sister, mother, father, parent, brother, grandmother, grandfather, grandparent, family, those, who, oh, these, those, they.
That’s my family.
Those are my parents.
Who’s she?
She’s my sister.
Oh, and these are my brothers.
教学反思:
Period 2 (A2)
I. Teaching Objectives
1. Knowledge Objectives:
(1) Expressions: well, have, day, bye, goodbye
(2) Structure: Have a good! Thanks! You, too. Bye!
— Nice to meet you. — Nice to meet you, too
(3) Grammar: Yes or No questions.
2. Ability Objectives:
(1) Identifying people and the relationship.
(2) Find out the correct relationship.
英语七年级上册课件 篇2
各位领导老师好,,我叫….我今天说课的内容是《牛津英语》7A Unit3 Let's celebrate第二课时。今天我要讲述的内容包括教学过程,教学创新方面,首先我要讲述教学过程,包括以下几点:
放一首圣诞歌,(问学生是否知道此歌曲,如果知道,可以进一步询问他们对这首歌的了解,然后延伸到本课主题,必要时可让学生唱这首歌,这样做可以缓解学生心情,调动学生上课积极性)
(“良好的开端是成功的一半”, 因此,我认为能以一种新颖的问候方式或复习方式进入一节课,,或循序渐进地导入所学的内容,那么可为这节课的成功打下基础,同时也能给自己适当的减压。)
通过对本课核心内容的揭示,可以为接下来的讨论做铺垫,我作为教师是一个引导者,可以率先发起简单的英语口语对话,由此促使更多学生参与。对话如下模式;
T:Do you know some famous festivals in china or western countries?
T:Great!Can you give us some examples? Just say something about it?
学生展开讨论并自愿回答。
这项活动使学生能够自由发挥,逐渐克服害羞不敢发言的缺点。课堂是学生展现自己的地方,而教师的鼓励少不了。通过学生发言,也可以使他们对本课知识印象深刻。丰富了学生的知识。
在PPT上会有不同国家地区某个节日庆祝的画面,让学生进行猜测,猜对者有奖励,学生回答完毕后,可以对他们进行知识的相关扩充。再让学生发言,说一说中国的一些传统节日风俗习惯及来源。
先让学生自己阅读,找出生词,并告诉老师,老师提醒之后带领学生阅读两遍,并且释义。讲解知识点。然后学生合作准备,老师请学生朗读。
5.展示重点词组句型,并进行练习。
在PPT上展示重点知识点如:
What are you cooking?
Why do you like fishing?
Where are you going?
Which is your favorite festival?
Thank you for telling me about the Mid-Autumn Festival.
It is wonderful!
Happy Halloween!
以及介词in, at, on用法,频率副词的使用。
然后进行课堂小测验,腾出五分钟让学生消化知识,对于不懂的知识点可以像老师提问。
这样设计的意图是使学生能够做到学以致用,对于掌握不太好的知识点可以加强记忆与理解。
做完练习之后,将知识点归纳整理,并让学生做好笔记,使学生养成良好的学习习惯。
将主要知识点罗列在黑板上,如重点词组句型等等,让学生能够一目了然,自主归纳总结
B要求学生写一篇有关庆祝节日的文章。在以上的学习过程中,学生以具备了阅读和处理相关信息的能力,因此这部分任务交给学生自己完成,以此提供学生运用语言,解决问题的空间。
C要求学生学完本课时后有自己的想法,比如随着外国节日在中国的不断盛行,如何保护好本国文化,并能够很好的吸收外国文化,准备好200字左右的演讲,下节课展示。
例如在认识节日时,我就通过让学生听春节的鞭炮声和喜气洋洋的新年音乐猜“What festival is this?”通过美丽的月亮图片和实物月饼,问学生What do people usually do at the Mid-Autumn Festival?通过一则美国总统奥巴马首次赦免了一只重45磅(20公斤)、名叫“勇气”的火鸡的新闻引出.
这样做可以使学生的听觉、视觉等多种器官参与英语活动,能更容易地引起并保持学生的学习兴趣,最大限度地调动学生的学习积极性。
例如在学习讨论最喜欢的节日时,我采用了多种形式的师生互动和生生互动,同
时在使用课堂用语时,我都坚持对学生进行文明礼貌教育,总是加上please和thank you 对学生多鼓励,多表扬,
在互动的课堂教学活动中,教师与学生,学生与学生就教学内容进行平等的交流,真诚的沟通,互相借鉴,取长补短,在合作的氛围中,知识变成了话题,变成了手段,整个课堂充满了创造色彩。
英语七年级上册课件 篇3
教学目标 学习称呼语和问候语
教学重点 打招呼用语
教学难点 如何正确运用打招呼用语
教具 多媒体、录音机 课时 1
教学课程 1. Greeting.
2. Warming-up
T: Class,Please stand up. Hello, class.
S: Hello, Ms…
T: Sit down please.
S: Thank you.
3. Drills
(1) 练习打招呼问好。
(2) 练习感谢他人。
(3) 练习告别语Goodbye。
4. Practise
1)Work in pairs part7 and part8
2) Complete the sentences.
Daming, ______ ______, please(请坐)
_____,______ (同学们好)
______(你好).Jack.
_______,_______ (谢谢), Miss Li.
_______(再见), Lucy.
5. Conclude
6. Homework
Complete part5 and part 6 个人修改
课后评价
教案
课题 Starter Module1 Unit2 课型 listeningandspeaking
教学目标 学习打招呼的用语,询问姓名和相互间的问候。
教学重点 打招呼用语,询问对方姓名的特殊疑问句及回答。
教学难点 一天中不同时间的打招呼用语
教具 多媒体、录音机 课时 1
教学课程 1.Greeting.
2.Warming-up
T: Good morning.What’s your name?
S: I’m … / My name is…
T: How are you?
S: Fine, thank you. And you?
T: I’m fine. too.
3.Drills
1)练习打招呼的用语 Good morning/Good afternoon/Good evening。
2)练习询问姓名和相互间的问候。
What’s your name? I’m …
How are you? I’m fine, thank you.
4.Practise
1)Work in pairs part7
2) Listen and number
3) Write the sentences.
nclude
6.Homework
英语七年级上册课件 篇4
一、Teaching materials:
Unit 3 Language in use (Module 10 Life history)
二、Targets for this perio d:
To summarize and consolidate past simple questions and negative sentences and the new vocabulary
三、Key points:
Key vocabulary— in, a lot
Key structures—Did you do…? Yes, I did. / No, I didn’t.
We didn’t do ….
四、Teaching methods:
Task-based approach, formal and interactive approach
五、Teaching aids
Blackboard, handouts
六、Teaching arrangements:
Step One To translate the sentences into English
1. 当你是个小男孩时,你骑自行车去上学吗?
Did you ride a bike to school when you were a boy?
2. 他是世界上最出名的作家之一。
He is one of the most famous wri ters in the world.
3. 七、八月份,我和哥哥拜访了住在海边的阿姨。
In July and August, my brother and I visited my aunt near the sea.
4. 莎士比亚是一个戏剧家和诗人
Shakespeare is a writer of plays and poems.
5. 1950年人们不使用移动电话和 计算机。
In 1950 people didn’t use cell phones or computer.
6. 当他在十四岁毕业时他决定当一名演员。
He decided to be an actor when he finished school at the age of f ourteen.
7. 你爹妈什么时候结婚的?
When did your mother and father marry?
8. 二十八岁时他迁往伦敦并加入一家剧团。
At twenty-eight he moved to London and joined a theatre company.
9. 他成了一名成功的演员并开始写戏剧。
He became a successful actor and started writing plays.
10. 你仍然能看到他的英文版和许多其他语言版的剧本。
You still see his plays in English and in many other languages.
Step Two To c omplete the con versation (Activity 1)
1. Students finish it by themselves.
2. Check the answers in pairs.
3. Two student act out the conversation.
4. Detailed explanation:
1) in +原料 / 颜色
e.g: He is in black.
He wrote a diary in ink. Cp: He wrote a diary with a pen.
2) a lot = very much ; often
e.g: He learned a lot when he was a child.
Step Three To use the conversation in Activity 1 to write about your parents. (Activity 3)
1. Students finish it by themselves.
2. Students read aloud their passage in the front of the classroom.
(Students should pay attention to the tense)
Example: My parents didn’t use computers at school when they were young. They watched TV with plain color and few channels. Sometimes they played f ootball and tennis in the park.
Step Four To learn about l ife in the past (Around the world)
1. Students read the passage and answer questions.
1) Did people use computers in 1950? No, they didn’t.
2) Was there satellite TV or Internet in the past? No, there wasn’t.
3) Why did people travel by bike or by bus? Because Cars were expensive.
4) Did they go to other countries on holiday? NO, they didn’t.
2. Students read it aloud.
Step Five To answer the questions according to the actual life ( Activity 5)
1. Students do it by themselves.
2. Studen ts work in pairs.
Step Six To finish all the exercises in Workbook
Homework:
1. To review Module 10 and copy all the words and expressions in P159
2. To finish Module 10, 点中典 & 轻巧夺冠
英语七年级上册课件 篇5
我说课的内容是北师大版数学七年级上册第三章的第一节课《字母能表示什么》,我主要从“教材分析”、“教法与学法分析”、“教学过程设计与说明”、“设计追求的特色”四个方面组织说课。
本节课北师大出版的新课程标准实验教材第三章的第一节课,在以前的学习中学生比较熟悉对具体数的操作,这是学生初次接触用较为抽象的字母来表示数,对字母表示数含义的理解有助于代数式以及方程的列出,是学习后续知识的关键。
1.知识目标:在现实情景中感受用字母表示数的意义,明确字母可以表示任何数,会用字母表示探索的规律,能用字母表示运算律和公式。
2.能力目标:经历探索数量关系,发现规律,运用字母表示规律,并通过运算验证规律的过程。
3.情感目标:一是体会字母表示数的意义,形成初步的符号感;二是进一步感受数学魅力,在学习过程中激发学生学习数学、探索数学奥妙的内在动力和外在的积极性,并在过程中培养学生的创新意识和实践能力。
1.立足本人的分析确定的:字母表示数的意义、数学规律的探索及符号表达,这些内容也是本课的难点。
2.可能基于学生个性差异、基础差异在学习过程中感觉困难的地方也是本课的难点。在教学过程中,我将认真注意,并尽力帮学生突破。
我校是定点的移民子女、进城务工子女就读学校,留守生在班级中占38%,学生的个性、基础能力差异很大,加上七年级学生处于小学与初中的衔接过渡初期,所以本节课我选择引导探索与分层教学相结合的方法。在新知的引出过程中,注意由浅入深,由特殊到一般地提出问题。引导学生自主探索,尤其在形成新知生长点的时候,充分发挥分层教学法的优点,帮学有余力的发挥潜能,挖掘
潜能,在先行的基础上发挥他们“先学后教”(后教就是帮助老师教,当老师的助手,在过程中达到教学相长的功效),教师抽出精力帮助学习困难的学生,帮助有“怪问题”的学生。注重时间分配,尽量做到先学在当堂,同层竞赛在当堂,异层帮辅在当堂,练习探讨在当堂、激发兴趣在当堂。
在教学过程中,关注每一学生,让每一个学生都动起来,促成学生成为学习的主人,从而发挥学生的主体作用。
(一)情景导入:利用电子白板的幕布创设问题情境(插入背景音乐,增加形象性和趣味性):“一只青蛙1张嘴,2只眼睛4条腿,1声扑通跳下水。两只青蛙2张嘴,4只眼睛8条腿,2声扑通跳下水。三只青蛙3张嘴,6只眼睛12条腿,3声扑通跳下水。6767”,让学生把这首儿歌继续唱下去,唱几句即可,然后老师提问:在这首儿歌中假如有a只青蛙,那么请同学们思考一下,应该有多少张嘴,多少眼睛多少腿,以及多少声普通跳下水?问题设计具有一定的趣味性,引出可以用字母表示数。目的是激发学生的学习欲望,体现数学来源于实际生活,数学是从人的需要中产生这一认识的基本观点。
(二)实验操作:用电子白板拉出问题。鼓励学生用火柴棒或木棒,按照“口”、“日”、 “目”搭建正方形,然后填表,找规律。按照同层独立先竞争、异层小组后合作、全班交流分享的办法进行。
在处理问题的过程中,充分抓住新知的生长点做文章,前四个空是铺垫,后一个空是新知生长点。对学有余力的学生,要求把100变成10000填空。这样做既培养了独立思考、勇于探索的能力,又培养了学生的帮扶意识和合作品质,还激发了学生的进取精神。
(三)问题解决和方法交流:按照小组交流和班级分享的办法进行。展示出想到的各种方法,小组推荐代表发言,鼓励学生对发言进行诊断评价,及时提醒学生注意发言、评价有无不妥,充分发挥教师平等中的首席作用。在这个过程中,还注意数学学习氛围的打造,保持教师刻意打造学习氛围的意识。
(四)随堂练习。分层次推出练习。设置三组,一是必做题2个;二是挑战题2个;三是攻坚题4个。设计时注重了层次,必做体现了保底;挑战和攻坚有层次的观注了个性差异。在同层之间进行竞赛性的统计,控制了学生思考的松紧度。
随堂练习的评价由先行的学生负责,教师给予适当的提醒。基本按照学生先做----代表评价-----教师适当帮助的步骤进行。
(五)课堂小结:主要通过学生回忆本节课所学内容,从内容、应用、数学思想方法、获取新知的途径方面先进行小结。教师尽量不补尾巴。以免形成学生总结时注意力不集中,教师总结才听的局面,在学生总结不全面可以给足时间让学生补充,真正当好平等中的首席。
控制时间,尽量让学生当堂完成,不加重课后负担,不降低学习的积极性。
在本节课的设计过程中,我注重把握了以下几点:
1.既研究了教法,也研究了学法,基本按照以学定教的.思路进行设计。
2.重视了新知生长点,在新知生长点创造学生思考的问题,给足思考的空间。
3.注重了先学后教,而且尽可能让学有余力的学生去教,实现将带兵,兵促兵,兵教兵的局面。
4.发挥先进的教学手段如电子白板在教学中的辅助作用。
5.发挥学生的主体地位,摆正教师平等中的首席地位。
6.尽量做到课外不留作业,作业、练习分层安排,真正关注学生的个体差异。
7.注重创设学习氛围,激发兴趣,培养兴趣,巩固兴趣。
英语七年级上册课件 篇6
新版七年级英语上册课件【1】
我说课的内容是北师大版数学七年级上册第三章的第一节课《字母能表示什么》,我主要从“教材分析”、“教法与学法分析”、“教学过程设计与说明”、“设计追求的特色”四个方面组织说课。
一、教材分析
(一)教材所处的地位
本节课北师大出版的新课程标准实验教材第三章的第一节课,在以前的学习中学生比较熟悉对具体数的操作,这是学生初次接触用较为抽象的字母来表示数,对字母表示数含义的理解有助于代数式以及方程的列出,是学习后续知识的关键。
(二)教学目标
1.知识目标:在现实情景中感受用字母表示数的意义,明确字母可以表示任何数,会用字母表示探索的规律,能用字母表示运算律和公式。
2.能力目标:经历探索数量关系,发现规律,运用字母表示规律,并通过运算验证规律的过程。
3.情感目标:一是体会字母表示数的意义,形成初步的符号感;二是进一步感受数学魅力,在学习过程中激发学生学习数学、探索数学奥妙的内在动力和外在的积极性,并在过程中培养学生的创新意识和实践能力。
(三)教学的重点、难点
1.立足本人的分析确定的:字母表示数的意义、数学规律的探索及符号表达,这些内容也是本课的难点。
2.可能基于学生个性差异、基础差异在学习过程中感觉困难的地方也是本课的难点。在教学过程中,我将认真注意,并尽力帮学生突破。
二、教法和学法分析
我校是定点的移民子女、进城务工子女就读学校,留守生在班级中占38%,学生的个性、基础能力差异很大,加上七年级学生处于小学与初中的衔接过渡初期,所以本节课我选择引导探索与分层教学相结合的方法。在新知的引出过程中,注意由浅入深,由特殊到一般地提出问题。引导学生自主探索,尤其在形成新知生长点的时候,充分发挥分层教学法的优点,帮学有余力的发挥潜能,挖掘
潜能,在先行的基础上发挥他们“先学后教”(后教就是帮助老师教,当老师的助手,在过程中达到教学相长的功效),教师抽出精力帮助学习困难的学生,帮助有“怪问题”的学生。注重时间分配,尽量做到先学在当堂,同层竞赛在当堂,异层帮辅在当堂,练习探讨在当堂、激发兴趣在当堂。
在教学过程中,关注每一学生,让每一个学生都动起来,促成学生成为学习的主人,从而发挥学生的主体作用。
三、教学过程设计及说明
(一)情景导入:利用电子白板的幕布创设问题情境(插入背景音乐,增加形象性和趣味性):“一只青蛙1张嘴,2只眼睛4条腿,1声扑通跳下水。两只青蛙2张嘴,4只眼睛8条腿,2声扑通跳下水。三只青蛙3张嘴,6只眼睛12条腿,3声扑通跳下水。6767”,让学生把这首儿歌继续唱下去,唱几句即可,然后老师提问:在这首儿歌中假如有a只青蛙,那么请同学们思考一下,应该有多少张嘴,多少眼睛多少腿,以及多少声普通跳下水?问题设计具有一定的趣味性,引出可以用字母表示数。目的是激发学生的学习欲望,体现数学来源于实际生活,数学是从人的需要中产生这一认识的基本观点。
在这个过程中,尽量发挥不同层次学生的作用,体现出学生的自主学习、自我探讨、总结交流等主体性的过程。
(二)实验操作:用电子白板拉出问题。鼓励学生用火柴棒或木棒,按照“口”、“日”、“目”搭建正方形,然后填表,找规律。按照同层独立先竞争、异层小组后合作、全班交流分享的办法进行。
填写下表:
1在处理问题的过程中,充分抓住新知的生长点做文章,前四个空是铺垫,后一个空是新知生长点。对学有余力的学生,要求把100变成10000填空。这样做既培养了独立思考、勇于探索的能力,又培养了学生的帮扶意识和合作品质,还激发了学生的进取精神。
(三)问题解决和方法交流:按照小组交流和班级分享的办法进行。展示出想到的各种方法,小组推荐代表发言,鼓励学生对发言进行诊断评价,及时提醒学生注意发言、评价有无不妥,充分发挥教师平等中的首席作用。在这个过程中,还注意数学学习氛围的打造,保持教师刻意打造学习氛围的意识。
(四)随堂练习。分层次推出练习。设置三组,一是必做题2个;二是挑战题2个;三是攻坚题4个。设计时注重了层次,必做体现了保底;挑战和攻坚有层次的观注了个性差异。在同层之间进行竞赛性的统计,控制了学生思考的松紧度。
随堂练习的评价由先行的学生负责,教师给予适当的提醒。基本按照学生先做----代表评价-----教师适当帮助的步骤进行。
(五)课堂小结:主要通过学生回忆本节课所学内容,从内容、应用、数学思想方法、获取新知的途径方面先进行小结。教师尽量不补尾巴。以免形成学生总结时注意力不集中,教师总结才听的局面,在学生总结不全面可以给足时间让学生补充,真正当好平等中的首席。
(六)布置作业:内容略。
控制时间,尽量让学生当堂完成,不加重课后负担,不降低学习的积极性。
四、设计追求的特色
在本节课的设计过程中,我注重把握了以下几点:
1.既研究了教法,也研究了学法,基本按照以学定教的思路进行设计。
2.重视了新知生长点,在新知生长点创造学生思考的问题,给足思考的空间。
3.注重了先学后教,而且尽可能让学有余力的学生去教,实现将带兵,兵促兵,兵教兵的局面。
4.发挥先进的教学手段如电子白板在教学中的辅助作用。
5.发挥学生的主体地位,摆正教师平等中的首席地位。
6.尽量做到课外不留作业,作业、练习分层安排,真正关注学生的个体差异。
7.注重创设学习氛围,激发兴趣,培养兴趣,巩固兴趣。
新版七年级英语上册课件【2】
Unit 1 Topic 3 How old are you ?
Section D
学习目标
1.学习以短文形式谈论姓名、年龄、学校、班级和电话号码等个人信息
2.能读懂短文并能从简单的名片中获得信息
3.能向大家做自我介绍
学习重点
以短文形式谈论姓名、年龄、学校、班级和电话号码
学习难点
第一人称和第三人称的转变
学习过程
(一)导入
(二)自学指导
1、预习课本P23 Part 1 ,复习书上的六个音标
2、预习课本P23 Part 2 ,分别找出Jane 和 Huang Hua 的个人信息
3、预习P23 Part 3 ,根据所给信息把空补充完整
4、背诵课本P24 Part 4a 4b
(三)问题导学 再看课本P22 Part 2 ,回答问题。
Where is Jane from ?__________________________
How old is she ?___________________________
What class is she in ? _____________________
Where is Huang Hua from ? _______________
What’s his English name ? _____________________
Are they in the same class ? ______________
(四)典题训练
(五)精讲点拨
1、They are not in the same class ,but they good friends.他们不在同一个班,但是他们是好朋友。
解析:same 意思是“相同的”,前面一定要用定冠词“the”,后面接单数名词。
but 意为“但是,可是”,起转折作用。
eg : We are in the same school ,but in different classes.我们在同一个学校,但是在不同的班级。
五.当堂检测
(一)用be动词的适当形式填空
1、---How old ________ you ?
2、----I ________ ten.3、---What _____ this ?-
4、---It _________ a pen.5、----Who ________ that ?
----She _________ Lucy.6、---What _________ these ?
----They ________ schoolbags.7、---__________ this a pen ?
----Yes , it _________.(二)单项选择
1.What’s that _______ Chinese ?
A、on B、in C、with
2.Is he ____________ English boy ?
A、a B、an C、the3、These are my _____________.A、book B、pens C、a friend4、---Is this your eraser ?----Yes ,____________.A、it is B、this is C、it’s5、They are not ________ the same class ,but they
are good friends.A、in B、on C、from
七、作业布置
(一)根据句意和首字母提示填空
1.They are in the s________ class.2、--How o________ is she ?---She is 15.3.Li Ming and Wang Fei are good f___________.4、I’m in a h_________ school.5、Is your p__________ number 3264-7853 ?
(二)选择填空
1、______ is Zhou Lan._________ phone number is 1358429764.A、Her , her B、She , her C、She , She2、What grade ______ your brother in ?
A、is B、am C、are3、---Is that a car ?---No ,____________
A、that isn’t B、that is C、it isn’t4、Nine and eleven is __________.A、thirteen B、fifteen C、twenty5、_________ are good friends.A、you ,he and I B、I ,you and he C、you and he ,I This is an English boy(男孩).His name is Jim.He is twelve.He is in my school.He and I are in the same grade.I’m in Class Three, Grade Seven, but he is in Class Four.I’m his good friend.He is my good friend, too.根据短文内容, 补全对话。
A: Excuse me, what’s his name?
B: His name is Jim.A: 6.______________________________
B: Yes.J-I-M, Jim.A: Where is he from?
B: 7.______________________________
A: How old is he?
B: 8.______________________________
A: Is he in your school?
B: 9.______________________________
A: Is he in Class Three, Grade Seven?
B: 10.______________________________
He is in Class Four, but he and I are good friends.A: Thank you.汉译英:1.布朗是他的姓氏。Brown is his ____ ____.12.那是一张地图吗
Is that ____ ____.13.它们是五辆公共汽车。
They are ____ ____.14.让我帮帮你吧。
Let ____ ____ you.15.给你。____ ____ are.(五)作业:请写一份自我介绍,内容包括姓名、年龄、国籍、班级、学校、电话号码。
七年级英语知识点
现在进行时态
概念:表示现在(说话瞬间)正在进行或发生的动作,也可以表示目前一段时间内或现阶段正在进行的活动。
结构:由be动词(am, is, are)+ 动词ing构成,其中be动词要与主语保持性数一致。
Mary is flying a kite in the park.玛丽正在公园里放风筝。
--What are you doing now? 你现在在干什么?
--I’m reading English.我正在读英语。
Are they drawing the pictures now? 他们正在画画吗?
动词现在分词是动词原形变化而来的,规则变化如下:
动词ing形式叫动词现在分词,其构成如下:
1)直接在动词后加ing
play—playing, do—doing, talk—talking, sing--singing
2)以不发音的字母e结尾的动词,先去e,再加ing
make—making, write—writing, have—having, take—taking
3)以重读闭音节结尾的动词且词尾只有一个辅音字母,应双写这个辅音字母,再加ing
run—running, stop—stopping, put—putting, swim—swimming
注意对现在进行时态的判断。判断一个英语句子用什么时态,主要看句子的时间状语,一般说来,每种时态都有与之相对应的时间状语。现在进行时表示现在(说话瞬间)正在进行或发生的动作。因此,这个时态最常用的时间状语是now;但有不少句子并没有now,只能通过提示语如look、listen等或者通过上下文来确定用现在进行时。
She is cleaning her room now.她正在打扫房间。
Look!The girl is dancing over there.看!那个女孩在那里跳舞。
--Can you go and play games with me? 你能和我们一起做游戏吗?
--Can’t you see I am doing my homework? 你没看见我正在做作业吗?
英语七年级上册课件 篇7
1. Knowing: tiring, educational, peaceful, fascinating, thrilling, take it easy, trek, jungle, fall,
2. Understanding: Be able to understand the meaning of the listening material.
3. Habit-forming: 1)---Where would you like to go on vacation?
---I'd like to go somewhere relaxing.
2) I like places where the people are really friendly.
4. Communicating: Talk about th e places they would like to visit and the reasons.
1. Habit-forming:
1)--Where would you like to go on vacation? --I'd like to go somewhere relaxing.
2) I like places where the people are really friendly.
2. Communicating: Talk about th e places they would like to visit and the reasons.
一.自主学习。
Task 1 Talk about the plans of vacation. 1. Read the adjectives and understand them.
2. Look at the two pictures careful, and write adjectives to describe the vacations .
3. 听录音完成1b。 4. Pair work::
A: Where would you like to go on vacation?
B: I'd like to trek through the jungle, because I like exciting vacations. What about you?
A: I 'd like to ... ...
1.读2a 部分句子,听录音排序。2.Listen again, choose the right answers.
3.找出短语:对...感兴趣_______________ 有一天_________/___________支付___________
4.理解下面的句子:
1)Wouldn't it be great if we could go on a vacation together? ._________________________
2) I hope to visit Hawaii one day ._______________________________________________
3) Would you be interested in going there?_________________________________________
4) I like places where the weather is always warm.__________________________________
5) I love places where the people are really friendly._________________________________
6) There's not much to do there. _______________________________________________
7) It has exciting things to do. _________________________________________________
5.两人一组练习听力对话。
二.合作共建:1. I like places where the weather is always warm.
2. I love places where the people are really friendly.
这两句话中,引导的定语从句的是关系副词__________。也就是说引导地点用_________。思
翻译:我知道火车到达这里的时间。__________________________________________________
三.诊断评价:
I. 用所给词的正确形式填空:
1. I hope _____________(see) Niagara some day. 2. He likes _____________( visit) Hawaii.
3. He would like _____________(visit) Hawaii. 4. He would love _____________(visit) Hawaii.
5. There is too much____________(do) today. 6.It has exciting things ___________(do) there.
5.Are you interested in ______________( go ) on a vacation?
6. What about _____________(trek ) through the jungle?
II. 翻译句子:
1.你想要去哪里度假?_______________________________________________________________
2.我想到丛林跋涉,因为我喜欢刺激的旅行。_____________________________________________
3.我想要去放松的某个地方。___________________________________________________________
4.我喜欢天气总是很温暖的地方。____________________________________________________
5.在Mexico 没有很多事情可做。______________________________________________________
1.Knowing: touristy, spotlight, consider, lively, sight, including, church, wine, translate, light,
wonderful.
2. Understanding: Be able to understand the meaning of the newspaper.
3. Habit-forming: ---Where would you like to go on vacation? ---I'd like to visit Kunming.
4. Communicating: Talk about th e places they would like to visit and the reasons.
1. Habit-forming: --Where would you like to go on vacation? ---I'd like to visit Kunming.
2. Communicating: Talk about th e places they would like to visit and the reasons.
1. Read tthis newspaper article about Paris.Circle the things you like about visiting Paris. Underline
the things you don't like.
2. Write these phrases: 下个星期_____________________ ……的首都_____________________
最热闹的城市之一__________________________________在欧洲_______________________
举例___________________________________最著名的教堂____________________________
乘地铁___________________一般来说____________________说英语____________________.
3. Understand the following sentences。
⑴For your next vacation, why not consider visiting Paris?
①Why not…=__________________?是提建议的一种方式,另外提建议的句子还有:
Let's go shopping! ______________________. Shall we go to France? _________________
What / How about visiting Hongkong! _________________________________.
②consider后面跟名词或动名词。如:请考虑我的建议。______________________.
我正在考虑换一份工作。_____________________________________________________.
⑵Paris is the capital of France, and one of the liveliest cities in Europe. 翻译下面的句子:
北京是中国的首都。_________________________请用大写字母书写。__________________.
⑶It doesn't have any beaches or mountains…
or,连词,或者,用于否定句或疑问句中,肯定句用and.
你喜欢牛奶还是茶啊?____________________ 我有三个苹果和两个梨。________________.
(⑷Travelling around Paris by taxi can cost a lot of money.
动名词做主语,谓语用____________.吃的太多对身体有害。___________________________.
Task 2 交际练习1.仿照3b部分对话,两人一组编造自己的对话。2.交际对话展示。
Task 3 学习4 Think of a city you know. Make a list of things you like and things you don't like
about the city. then talk to your partner about it.
二.合作共建。1.区别spend , take, cost, pay 四个单词的区别。
2.France is quite an expensive place相似的单词为rather, 两者的区别为__________.
三.诊断评价。
( )1. Mount Emei is oe of_______in China. A.the most beautiful mountains
B.most beautiful mountains C.the most beautiful mountain D.most beautiful mountain
( )2.There are_____stars in the sky and you can see them at night.
A.thousand of B.two thousands C.thousands of D.two thousands
( )3.The dictionary________me $5. A.paid st C.spend D.took
( )4.You look tired, why not____a short rest? A.have B.having C.to have D.will have]
用所给的单词的正确形式填空。
1. Every year many___________(tourist)go there for their vacation.
2. There are many things__________(do)in Singapore. 3. Hong kong is a beautiful palce for____(shop).
4. Hawaii has beautiful___________(beach). 5. I decide_____________(visit)Beijing next month.
1.下个星期你要去哪里?_______________________________________________
2.我希望去游览夏威夷。_________________________________________________
3.在新加坡坐地铁观光是最容易的。_______________________________________
1. Knowing: brainstorm, agency, package, depend, advertisement, whale, actually. 2.Understanding:The meaning of the listening contents. 3. Practicing: answer the phone, take messages, call sb.back, some information on somewhere warm/cold, go on vacation, go on a nature tour, a great whale watch, depend on, find out. municating: be able to practice the listening contents fluently in pairs.
1.Understanding:The meaning of the listening contents. 2. Practicing: answer the phone,take messages,callsb.back,some information on,somewhere warm/cold,go on vacation,go on a nature tour,a great whale watch,depend on,find out. 3. Communicating: be able to practice the listening contents fluently in pairs.
Task1: Learn 1&2c 1. Answer some questions,such as,
①Where would you like to go for your vacation?Why?_______________________
②What are important to you when you go on vacation?_______________________
③Can you introduce some places of interest in the world?_____________________
2. Make a conversation according to the questions above,then practice in pairs,such as,
A: Where would you like to go? B:I'd like to go somewhere warm.
A: What else can you tell me? B:I don't want_________________________.
A:______________________ B:___________________________________.
1. Jeff has a summer job at a travel agency.Lsten to the conversations and number the pictures.
杰弗在一家旅行社有一份夏天的'工作,听对话并给图片标上序号。
2. Listen to the conversations again and complete the chart.
3. Role play Jeff's conversations and pay attention to the sentences using on the phone.
answer the phone_______________take messages______________call sb.back_______________
Jeff Marino speaking______________________Is that…speaking?_______________________
二.合作共建。根据下列句子,小组讨论划线部分的含义。
1. Could you please answer the phone?_____________________________________.
2. Just take messages and I'll call people back.________________________________.
3. I'd like some information on vacation packages,please._____________________________
4. I don't know. Somewhere warm._________________________________________________.
5. I hope to go on a nature tour..______________________________.
6. We have a great whale watch tour.You might like that.______________________________
7. It depends on where it is.______________________________.
8. I'd like to go somewhere that's fun for kids.______________________________________.
三.系统总结。
1.试总结常见的电话用语:_________________________________________________________
2.试回忆表达建议的句型:_________________________________________________________
3.总结would like的用法以及相似的结构______________________________________________.
1. Hawaii is a______________ (tourist) place. 2. I hope____________(make) more friends in China.
( )3. I'd like to visit Sydney _________ my next vacation. A.for B.on C.at D.in
( )4. What _________ can you tell me?A.other B.else C.the other D.others
( )5.—Would you like to go out for a walk with us? —_____, but I must finish my homework first.
A.Of course not B.That's all right C.I'd love to D.Yes,I do
6.我们想要待在一个有大游泳池的地方。___________ ___________to stay a place with a big pool.
7.下个假期你要去哪儿?___________ would you like to go ___________ your next ___________?
8.今年夏天你想去哪里度假?_____ _____ _________would you like to_______ _______this summer?
9.我希望游览夏威夷。I hope ___________ ___________ Hawaii one day.
英语七年级上册课件 篇8
一 学生情况分析(学生62人,其中男生:36人,女生:26 人)
1.学习水平不均
有的学生对小学英语比较重视,学得很好;但有的学生或学校不重视,学得很不好,还有几个甚至完全没有学过。有的学生笔试不错,但语音、语调、书写都有待加强。因此,整个班级的英语水平很不平衡,给日常教学带来诸多的不便,提高了难度。
2.学习习惯不好
学生刚刚从小学进入初中,处于一个衔接的阶段,学习任务加重,学习的习惯不是很好,没有形成一定的适合自己的方法,都有待改善。
总之,既要避免好生吃不饱的.现象,又要努力把目前英语有欠缺的学生拉上去,激发他们的兴趣和信心,赶上中上的水平学生。在今后的教学中应该注重培养、激发兴趣,教给学生学习的方法,从学生的学习兴趣、学习能力、生活经验和认知水平出发,倡导体验、实践、参与与交流的学习方式和任务型的教学途径,发展学生的综合语言运用能力,使语言的学习过程成为学生形成积极的情感态度、主动思维和大胆实践、提高跨文化意识和形成学生自主学习能力的过程,这是新课标和新目标英语的要求。
教学措施和辅助
二 课时总安排
总共100课时:授课 课时 复习 课时
测试 课时 机动 课时
三.教材总体目标、单元要求及重难点
The goal:
The goal of Go for it is to make language a step-by-step progression that builds confidence and leads to open-ended activities where students can actively relate learning to their personal lives.
Go For It! 是以《英语课程标准》为依据,以学生的英语语言综合运用能力为目标。不仅以语言知识、语言技能为重点,而且更注重学生的学习策略、情感态度和文化意识。教学内容的处理和取舍灵活开放, 只要教师从学生的实际水平和语言能力出发,任何教学内容的调整或取舍,任何教学步骤的安排都是可行的。“I sometimes go to the last to do the group work first…It depends on the teachers’ knowledge of the students actual language ability…”(David Nunan);提倡教师结合学生实际,充分利用学生、教师本身和环境中一切可以利用的资源,丰富教学内容,创造运用英语的机会,注意多渠道开发教学资源。 “Don’t use just the textbook. Anything in real life that connect and appropriate to the lesson can be used as teaching resources.”(David Nunan);提倡任务型语言教学,教学进度整体把握,教学形式不拘一格;课堂以学生为主体,以任务为主线,重视体验参与,课后访谈调查,读写扎记,重视语言运用;正视个体差异,倡导过程激励,以多层次、多角度、多主体的结果与过程并重的评价方式激励进步。
The key points of each unit:
Topic Functions Structures
U 1 Making new friends Introduce yourself
Greet people
Ask for and give telephone numbers Present tense to be
What questions
Prossessive adjectives:my,your,his,her
U2 Things in the classroom
Identify ownerships Demonstratives:this,that
What questions and Yes/No questions
How do you spell pen?
U3 The family Introduce people
Identify people Demonstratives:these,those
Subject pronouns:I,he,she
Yes/No questions
Plural nouns
U4 Things around the house Talk about where things are Where questions and Yes/No questions
Prepositions: on,in,under
Subject pronouns: they
U5 Spending time with friends Ask and answer questions about ownership
Make suggestions Present tense to have
Yes/No questions and short answers: let’s
Adjectives of quality
U6
Food Talk about likes and dislikes Present tense to like
Yes/No questions and short answers
Affirmative and negative statements
U7
Shopping Ask about prices
Talk about clothing
Thank someone Demonstratives:this,that,these,those
How much questions
U8
Dates Talk about dates When questions
Prossessive “s”
How old are you?
U9
Movies Talk about preferences
Make plans Present tense to want
Yes/No questions and short answers:
Adjectives of quality
U10 Joining a club Talk about abilities Modal verb can
Yes/No questions and short answers:
Affirmative and negative statements
What questions
U11 Daily routines Talk about daily routines
Ask about and say times When questions
What time is it?
Adverbs of frequency
U 12 School subjects Talk about preferences
Give reasons What questions
Why questions
Who questions
Adjectives of quality
四、 教材分析
新目标任务型教学的特色理念:《新目标英语》是以任务为基础的语言教学,在教材的设计上,遵循了自然言语、情境真实性、语言形式为交流功能性服务、层层深入阶梯型发展语言能力、在做中学等最新教学原则和理念,注重引导学生体会文化差异,培养学生自主学习能力,完全符合教育部的《义务教育阶段英语课程标准》的要求。本教材的教学理念:“知识用于行动”,强调“语言应用”,培养“创新、实践能力”,发展“学习策略”。
人教社《新目标英语》教材的几大特色:
A. 图文并茂。一幅副充满情趣,幽默生动的画面,令你眼睛一亮。它不仅版面设计充满新意,而且在内容和结构方面更富有创意 更具时代感,更有现代气息,更加贴近学生的生活。学生一拿到课本后都爱不释手,迫不及待地翻阅。
B. 实用性强。每个单元的选材都来源于学生的学习和生活。紧紧地与学生的年龄特征、认知结构、生活经验联系在一起。如第一册的十四个话题:认识新朋友、教室里的物品、家庭成员、食品、购物、电影、参加社团、生活习惯、学习科目、国家与语言。第二册的十二个话题:邻居、动物、足球、职业、周末活动、音乐、人物性格与外貌、天气、节日、度假与休闲、流行文化、规章制度与日常生活。由于这些都是学生熟悉的话题,生活中经常碰到的事情,所以学生容易接受,学习热情自然也高。使教学活动由“要我学”转变为“我要学”。
C.注重交际。针对中国学生学英语普遍存在的“聋哑病”,教材设计了大量的听说读写材料。每个单元都有语言活动,且内容不同,形式多样,学生对这些活动充满兴趣,所以大家都能情绪高昂地参加pair work, group work, games等活动。学生们充满了自信,开心地练习说英语,教室里常常充满了欢歌笑语。同学们都喜欢上英语课,他们能为学以致用而感到兴奋,同时也体验到了学习语言的快乐。
D.词汇量大。第一册有词汇700个左右,第二册约450个,第三册约450个,第四册约400个, 第五册约500个,合计2500个。这一点正好达到《英语课程标准》5级的要求。大大丰富了学生的词汇量,让学生能更好地表达自己的所思所想。同时也要求学生必须采取有效的记忆单词的方法,就会事半功倍,否则难以适应教材的要求。这时学生特别需要教师的指导 .。
《新目标英语》的教材设计原则
a.言语、情境真实性原则 (The authenticity principle)
任务的设计要提供给学习者明确、真实的语言信息。语言情境、语言形式等要符合交际的功能和规律。使学习者在一种自然、真实或模拟真实的情境中体会语言、掌握语言的应用。
b.形式-功能性原则 (The form-function principle)
任务的设计注重语言形式和语言功能的结合。形式-功能性原则,旨在使学习者掌握语言形式的同时,培养其自我把握语言功能的能力;每一阶段任务的设计都具有一定的导入性,学生在学习语言形式的基础上,通过系列任务的训练,能够自己进行推理和演绎,从而理解语言的功能,并在交际中进行真实运用。
c.阶梯型任务原则 (The task dependency principle)
学习单元中任务的设计由简到繁,由易到难,层层深入,并形成由初级任务到高级任务并由高级任务涵盖初级任务的循环。在语言技能方面,遵循先听、读,后说、写的设计顺序,使教学阶梯式地层层递进。
d. 在做中学原则 (Learning by doing)
自始至终引导学生通过完成具体的任务活动来学习语言,让学生为了特定的学习目的去实施特定的语言行动,通过完成特定的交际任务来获得和积累相应的学习经验。
五、教学具体措施及辅助活动
1.利用直观教具和教学辅助媒体,激发兴趣,增加容量,整体优化课堂教学。
2.每日进行单词竞赛。
3.学唱英文歌。
4.坚持值日生报告。
5.开展多种游戏和竞赛活动。
六、教学进度表
Week 1 Starter Unit 1 5课时
Week 2 Starter Unit 2& Starter Unit 3 5课时
Week 3 Unit 1 6课时
Week 4 Unit 2 6课时
Week 5 Unit 3 6课时
Week 6 Revision 6课时
Week 7 Unit4 6课时
Week8 Unit 5 6课时
Week 9 Unit 6 6课时
Week 10 Revision 6课时
Week 11 Middle examination 6课时
Week 12 Unit 7 6课时
Week 13 Unit 8 6课时
Week 14 Unit 9 6课时
Week 15 Unit 10 6课时
Week 16 Unit 11 6课时
Week 17 Unit 12 6课时
Week 18 Revision 6课时
Week 19 Revision 6课时
Week 20 Final examination
英语七年级上册课件 篇9
一、教学目标:
1. 语言知识目标:
1)
2)
① — No, I can't. / Yes, I can.
② …
③ help2.
可以培养学生的社会责任意识,为他人做自己力所
二、
1. 教学重点:
1) 能过听力训练来提高学生们听说能力。
2) 进行阅读训练,通过阅读简短的文章来学习语言知识,提高综合运用能力。
2. 教学难点
1. 听力训练
2. 阅读2b部分的短文并完成相关要求。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Daily greeting.
2. Check the homework. Let some Ss report what his/her family members can do.
Ⅱ. Presentation
1. T: Show some really instruments like violin, drums. Then play some of them. Tell Ss I can play the drums, I can
play the violin, I can play the violin…
Ss: Do after the teacher, Act as he/she are playing an instrument. The say: I can play the piano, I can play the piano,
I can play the drums…
Ⅲ. Game (Talent show)
1. Act and show your classmates your talent.
T: Please stand in front of your classmate. Act and say what you can. e.g.
S1: (sing and dance) I can sing and dance.
S2: (play the drum) I can play the drum.
S3: …
2. Ask as many students as possible to say their abilities.
Ⅳ. Listening
the sounds you hear in 1a.
2. Play the recording again and check the answers.
3. T: Now let's work on 1c. First, let one student read the words and phrases aloud.
Then listen to the tape and circle the words and phrase you hear.
4. Ss listen to the tape and circle the words and phrases they hear.
5. Check the answers:
tape again. Then try to fill in the blanks.
动作这两个方面的听清,其他作为非重点内容。
7. Ss listen to the recording carefully and try to fill in the blanks.
8. Check the answers with the class.
Ⅴ. Group work
S1: Bill can play the guitar, but he can't sing.
S3: Frank can play the piano, but he can't sing or dance. S4: …
Ⅵ. Reading
1. T: Let's meet three new friends, Peter, Aland and Ma Huan. What can they do?
S2: What can Alan do?
Ⅶ. Reading
What's each ad's title? Now let's read the three
2. 综合广告内容与三个题目,看每个题目与广告的内容是否最为贴切。
4. Check the answers with the class.
Ⅷ. Reading
1. T: Suppose Peter, Alan and Ma Huan want to help to do something after school. Which ad is right him/her? Now
2. 方法指导:首先,再次明确每个能做的事情,以及他/她喜欢做的事情;然后,看每则广告中要求应聘者去
做什么事情;最后,综合考虑三个人的情况,做出一个选择。
英语七年级上册课件 篇10
尊敬的各位老师:
大家好!
今天我说课的`内容是七年级英语上册第五单元第一课时,这一课时可分为三部分,一是要求掌握一些球类运动的名词,英语单词是学好英语的基础,只有掌握大量的英语单词,在丰富知识的同时,才能提高应用语言的能力;第二部分是听力训练;第三部分是口语训练Do you have a ……句型。下面我将从以下几个方面阐述说课内容。
一、教材分析
本教材倡导语言教学的交互性和实用性,为学生提出了自然的、有意义的语言环境,本单元主要是学习动词have的一般现在时的用法:Let引导的祈使句及形容词的使用,一般现在时是第五第六两个单元的重难点、学会第三人称单数形式的灵活使用,同时也复习了第三单元名词复数的变化规则,谈论对各种球类运动的看法,从而引出形容词的用法,用层层递进的方式,逐步扩大和加深,具有很强的逻辑性,整体感。
鉴于以上的分析,为更好地实现目标教学,进而提高课堂效益,我结合教材特点及学生实际情况为这一节课拟定了以下目标。
1、知识目标帮助学生掌握三会、四会单词如have soccer ball tennis racket=bat ping-pong volleyball basketball does让学生掌握句型的灵活运用
2、能力目标让学习形成良好的听说习惯,同时让学生了解一些与球类运动相关的信息
3、德育目标通过向学生展示一些体育明星的图片,让学生热爱运动、热爱祖国、激发学生的爱国荣誉感。
教学重点:本课的第一部分是一幅展示新功能在实际生活中运用的图画,图中引出了本课在操练新知识所需用到的重点单词,新的句型也呈现在人物头上的气泡中,本课的重点是让学生学会使用Do you have……的句型。
教学难点:句型Do you have……的肯定回答及否定回答
二、教法分析
根据教材需要,采取多种教学方法交互使用权用,精讲巧练,由浅入深、由易到难,提高学生的学习兴趣,展开循序渐进地深化教学内容,展开以教师为主导、以学生为主体师生双边活动,主要以直观教学、交际性教学和任务型教学,贯穿整个教学过程,增加了直观性和趣味性,激发学生兴趣,活跃课堂气氛,提高教学效果。
三、学法指导
我所采用的教法有助于学生掌握以下学法
1、科学地储备大量的学生感兴趣的课外知识,学生掌握了感受兴趣的丰富的课外知识才能进行良好、积极的语言交流。
2、掌握大量的语法知识、学生要交流就必须了解语言规律,丰富词汇、熟悉语法规则,学会由各个话题而展开的交际内容,这样学生的知识才记得深刻,灵活度大
3、及时巩固、反复记忆
教师在课堂上所讲的语言难点、重点、学生应及时整理、再次认识并积极使用。
4、养成听的习惯
学生要经常听录音,听教师讲英语,听同学们讲英语、这对学习英语是很有好处的,
5、积极操练,重在口头
在课堂上,学生要积极参与教师设计的每个教学活动,要大胆开口、课后和同学进行及时交流,把书本知识变成自己的知识和语言,只有多练才能实现脱口说英语的目的。
四、教学过程设计
我的课堂的整体设计分四个主要步骤进行,即新授、听力、巩固、和作业
第一步:新授
1、出示几幅图来出现我们这节课将会学习的球类运动的名词以及相应的名星:在教学单词的过程中,用What is this in English和How do you spell it句型和学生进行双边活动,掌握本课所学习的新单词
2、学习新句型,通过图,来学习I have a soccer ball……句型,并让学生多读、多理解I have……句型
3、让学生整体复习巩固一下我们这节课所学习的新单词,让学生会读,并掌握拼写。
4、让学生以唱的形式复习新单词及I have……句型,如Soccer ball . Soccer ball.I have a Soccer ball.
为活跃课堂气氛,请个别学生为下列句子谱曲并唱如basketball. basketball.I have a basketball.这一部分学生比较感兴趣,学生可随意发挥,也可根据自己所熟悉的歌曲的歌谱来唱出这些句子。
5、新授I have……句型的否定句,一般疑问句、肯定回答和否定回答。
第二步听力训练
请学生听录音,把所听到的单词圈起来,然后检查答案
请学生听第二遍,并跟着读,回答下列三个问题
Do you have a computer game?
Do you have a baseball bat?
Do you have a ping-pong bat?
第三步巩固
1、通过猜猜我有什么的活动。巩固句型Do you have……及回答
2、请学生以唱的形式练一练这对话
第四步作业布置
运用下面的单词编写三组Do you have……问句并作答
Volleyball football basketball
五、板书设计
DO you have a soccer ball
New words:
Soccer ball basketball volleyball baseball football tennis ping-pong bat=racket
I have a soccer ball:
Do you have a soccer ball?
Yes I do. No I don’t
六、本节课教学效果的预测
本节课设计本着讲练结合的要求,把教学的内容目标化、课堂教学交际化、而且在设计充分考虑学生的现状,保证所有学生能够积极参与,能重视知识传授与能力培养相结合,循序渐进、因材施教、符合以教师为主导、学生为主体、以会学生为主旨、以练为主线的四主要求。
七、评价手段
课堂教学中主要使用的形成性评价,其主要目的不是为了选拨少数优秀学生,而是为了挖掘学生的学习潜能,提高学生的学习兴趣,在课堂教学中,我便用的评价形式有两种:学生互评和教师评价。
英语七年级上册课件 篇11
人教版英语七年级上册Unit7 How much are these socks? Section A 1a-1c说课稿
新堡初级中学
石勇亮
一、教材分析
1.教材的地位、作用及前后联系:
新目标英语七年级上册第7单元第一课时(1a-1c)。
话题:询问价格,贴近学生的日常生活。
与Starter Unit3辨认颜色以及Unit 6谈论好恶联系紧密,学习询问价格的同时可以复习巩固之前的知识。
2.教学内容:
课题:How much are these socks ? 话题:“ask about prices”。目标语言:
--How much is „?
--it’s„
--How much are „?
--They are„
3.教学目标 ①知识目标
词汇:socks
shorts sweater trousers
jacket
skirt 句型:--How much is this T-shirt?
--It’s seven dollars.--How much are these socks?
--They are two dollars..②能力目标:掌握用how much„句型来询问价格,让学生能够利用简单的英语进行购物,培养学生的听说读写能力。③情感目标:
(1)树立正确的消费观念,养成节约用钱的生活习惯;(2)知道人民币与美元的差别,了解中西方的文化差异。4.教学重点与难点
我把名词单复数的应用和如何在现实生活中询问东西的价格确定为本节课的重点与难点。为了突破难点,教学中利用了大量的图片、实物,给学生提供非常直观的感性认识。
二、学情分析
农村学生学英语起步晚,怕犯错。在教学中努力营造宽松、民主、和谐的教学氛围,积极鼓励他们大胆尝试,保护他们的自尊心和积极性。抓住七年级学生活泼、好动、好胜心强的特点,引进小组竞争机制,倡导其参与活动。
三、教法分析
1、情景引入法:利用多媒体创设情景,引入新知。吸引学生注意力,使他们对即将学习的新知识产生好奇。
2、听说法:对目标语言进行反复操练,以达到灵活运用的目的。
3、任务型教学法:设计一系列的任务活动,让学生在完成任务的过程中掌握目标语言。
四、学法分析 1.分组合作学习。2.“为用而学,用中学,学了就用”:本课时的目标语言是询问事物的价格,与学生实际生活联系紧密,所以应该充分利用创造的情景和实物给与学生练习英语口语的机会。
五、教学过程设计
Step1、Warm up and Lead in:
1、创设情境,引入新单词
socks shorts sweater T-shirt trousers jacket
skirt
2、复习学过的句型
What’s this ∕that in English?
What color is it?
3、注意名词的单复数 a pair of trousers/shorts/socks two pairs of trousers/shorts/socks Step2、练习、巩固新单词,完成活动1a、1b Step3、教授、练习新句型,完成活动1C
将dollar与人民币单位yuan相比较,注意dollar的单复数变化。
此环节中结合图片设计师生对话、结对活动、句子接龙等任务,让学生分小组竞赛,练习巩固新句型。在练习的过程中,将重点句型How much is it?发散为How much are they?重点掌握单复数在此句型中的变化。Step4.综合运用
How much is that red hat? It’s 6 dollars.How much are your white trousers?
They are 10 dollars.加大句子难度继续操练,巩固新词汇和句型。
此环节将表示颜色的形容词带入操练句型中,并结合学生穿的毛衣、裤子、身边的尺子、书包、铅笔、橡皮擦擦等物品让学生自己编对话。Step5、总结回顾 词汇:sock
T-shirt
shorts
sweater
trousers
shoe skirt
dollar
2、句型:--How much is this T-shirt?
--It’s 7 dollars.--How much are these socks?--they are 2 dollars.Homework: Ask about prices of your deskmate’s clothing, and write down your conversations.询问你同桌衣物的价格,并将你们的对话写下来。Step6、板书设计
Unit 4 How much are these socks?
(Section A
1a – 1c)Clothing
jacket
A: How much is this T-shirt? a pair of socks
B: It’s seven dollars.two pairs of trousers
A: How much are these socks? Shorts shoes skirt sweater
B: They are two dollars.
英语七年级上册课件 篇12
Unit 4 Where’s my schoolbag?
一. 教学内容
本单元的主要内容是谈论物品所在的位置。通过这一话题,训练学生的听、说、读、写四项基本技能,让学生通过询问物品的位置,学习一些有关家居物品和学习用品的单词,以及方位介词in, on, under,等的用法;学习并掌握Where问句的问答,一般疑问句提问并用方位介词来回答;学习名词单复数及人称代词they 的用法,同时培养学生养成干净、整洁、合理摆放物品的好习惯。
二. 教学目标
1.知识目标:A. 掌握有关物品的新单词:table, bed,, bookcase, sofa, chair,desk , room,hat , radio, clock,, tape player, tape, model plane, etc;
B. 熟练运用in, on, under, 等介词;
C. 熟练运用Where问句和一般疑问句及其回答;
D. 掌握名词单复数及人称代词they的用法。
2.能力目标:A.学会用英语准确描述物品所在的位置;
B. 学会用英语询问自己的或他人物品的具体位置;
C. 能够合理地描述和设计房间。
3.情感目标:A. 培养学生整齐地摆放自己物品的生活习惯;
B.通过小组对话、讨论、调查和设计等一系列的课堂活动,培养学生的合作精神。
4.学习策略:A. 交际策略: 学会与他人合作交流,并能把语言材料用到真实的生活中去;
B.资源策略:学会利用一切可利用的学习资源,如词典,音像资料,网络等来获取更多的学习信息;
C.认知能力:积极思考,及时反馈;
D.调控策略:在反思,顿悟和自醒中不断调整自己的学习策略。
三. 教学重点、难点
1. 重点:A. 方位介词: in, on, under, (add:behind, in front of, next to可以自己增或删)等的用法;
B.Where 的特殊疑问句和一般疑问句:Is the… in/on/under the …?的肯定、否定回答;
C. 新单词:table, bed,, bookcase, sofa, chair,desk , room,hat----
2. 难点:A. 能够准确运用方位介词描述物品所在的位置;
B.能够运用Where问句找到物品的位置。
四. 教学方法
采用任务型语言教学,实施情景教学法、交际法、情感激励法等教学方法。
五.课时安排
第一课时:Section A 1a, 1b, 1c
第二课时:Section A 2a, 2b, 2c, 2d
第三课时:Section A Grammar Focus, 3a, 3b,3c
第四课时:Section B 1a, 1b, 1c, 1d, 1e
第五课时:Section B 2a, 2b, 2c
第六课时:Section B 3a,3b,self- check
七年级上册课件
七年级上册课件(篇1)

目标:
【知识与技能】
(1)认识水循环的过程。通过水循环导图的认识,归纳总结工作出物质三态之间发生变化的规律。
(2)知道物态变化的概念,能够 说出各种物态变化的吸热、放热情况,知道热量是能量代一种形式。
(3)知道水在生活、生产、技术中的各种应用,了解水对人类生命的意义。
【过程与方法】
组织学生考察 “学校或社区附近水资源的污染情况”来认识水对人类生活、生产的重大意义。
【情感、态度与价值观】
(1)通过对“珍贵水资源”的了解,增强节约用水、爱护水淘汰的意识,做到节约用水从点滴开始。
(2)通过考察“学校或社区附近水资源的污染情况”,体现自主学习的愉悦、实践活动的兴趣。
【重点、难点】
重点
物质三态的变化规律、吸放热情况,对水资源的认识。
难点考察“学校或社区附近水资源的污染情况”的.活动指导。
【教学设计】
一、创设情境 导入新课
导语一 师:同学们,面黄奔腾的江河和浩瀚的海洋都是由——(水)组成的,皑皑的冰山雪岭是由——(冰)组成的,飘荡的白云是由——(水和冰晶)组成的,包围地球的大气中还含有大量的水蒸气。
水、冰雪、冰晶、水蒸气,他们都属于水的三态,他们不停地运动着、变化着、循环着,形成一个巨大的水的循环系统,今天,我们一起来认识这一系统——水循环。
二、合作交流 解读探究
1.认识水的循环
【看一看】请同学们仔细观察课本图2—39水循环示意图。
【议一议】
(1)水的三态变化有什么规律?
(2)如果水的三态变化停止了,水循环还能进行吗?自然界的气候将会怎样?
(3)如果水循环停止了,人类的生活又将会怎样?
(4)水循环过程能量是如何转移的?
通过讨论使学生认识,水循环和我们的生活密切相关,水资源就是巨大的能源,并可以转化为其他形式的能。物态变化过程伴随着能量的转移。
【小结归纳】(板书)
(1)水循环的方式:
①陆地水循环;②海陆间水循环;③海洋间水循环。
(2)水循环的途径:
①蒸发;②降雨;③水气输送;④径流;⑤蒸腾;⑥下渗。
【思考讨论】:水循环的意义是什么?
1、联系岩石圈、水圈、大气圈和生物圈,并在它们之间进行能量交换,使物质发生转移。
2、使各种水体相互转化,并使水资源不断更新、清洁。
3、使人类获得永不枯竭的水资源。
2、珍贵的水资源
【看一看】投影网上下载关于水资源的图片的文字资料,
启发学生讨论。
【议一议】
(1)水为什么珍贵?(2)水为人类提供了什么?
【点 拨】让学生举例,教师不必做出评价,学生充分发表自己的观点和见解后,教师可做概括。启发学生从生产、生活、社会的方方面面去考虑水对人类社会的重要性,提供表现资源缺水情景的资料和案例,让学生认识到水资源的不可缺性。
3、如何保护水资源
【看一看】
(1)资料:目前,全球约有100多个国家缺水,13亿人缺少饮用水,30亿人的饮用水不符合卫生要求,有40%的河流被污染,每年至少有1000万人因
饮用水不合格而致病。
(2)图片:
【议一议】
(1)破坏水资源给我们带来哪些危害?
(2)我们应该怎样保护水资源?
【点拨】师:同学们通过刚才学习水源污染以及严重缺水给人类带来极大的危害。我们应该知道水资源是十分珍贵的,应从自身做起,从现在做起,养成节约用水,保护水资源的好习惯。
【实践考察】关于考察“学校或社区附近水域污染情况”的指导。
(1)考察前准备:
①查找相关资料,了解水污染的种类和危害;
②学会用PH试纸测酸碱度,准备相机、笔、记录本等器材;
③确定考察的河段及沿河两岸有关单位、工厂。
(2)分组,进行安全纪律教育:
(3)实际考察
①选定水域,观察河水的颜色、河边所见污染物、河中生物生长情况,利用试纸测试河水的酸碱度;
②请河岸居民中知情者介绍水域的有关情况,了解有关数据;
③考察科索沃污染源、工业污染源等,考察其主要污染物对水的污染,污染物的排
量的排放位置,并画图记录下来;
④分析主要污染物致使水质主原因,
(4)撰写考察报告:
①报告要实事求是地反映调查情况,有关数据必须准确、具体,对个别不清楚的数
据要再进行调查和测定;
②报告应科学地进行分析,明确污染源及其危害,并提出合理的治理方案。
(5)交流与思考:
在交流讨论的基础上,优化对水域的治理方案,以全班的名义向城建部门写一封建
议书。
(6)开展宣传活动:
①支水域两岸及街道张贴宣传标语,宣传治理水污染的重要意义;
②宣传治理水污染的方案。
三、应用迁移 巩固提高
类型一: 水循环
[例1] 江河、湖、海、土壤、植物中的水通过 蒸发 的方式变成水蒸气升入空中;冰山上的冰以 升华 方式变成水蒸气,升入空中,水蒸气随气流运动到各个地方,当水蒸气在高空遇冷时,有的 液化 成小水滴,有的 凝华 成小冰晶,小水滴和小冰晶组成云,云中的小水滴遇冷也会 凝固 成小冰晶,小冰晶长大后,便会降落到高山、地面,这就是雪,小水滴长大后,落到地面,这就是雨,雨再汇入江河、湖、海,再回到开头,从而形成一个水循环。
类型二: 节约用水与水资源保护
[例2][《中学生学习报》31期]水资源主要是指 淡水 资源,虽然地球看起来是一个“水球”,但是人类可直接利用的水却很少。目前,在利用水资源方面存在的主要问题有:(1)节水意识淡薄(2)水资源污染严重。
[变式1]有关水的利用不正确的是 ( D )
A.水可以塑造自然美景 B.水是人类的生命之源
C.水是各种植物的生命之本 D.水是各种污染的天然消化场所
四、总结反思 拓展升华
【总 结】
(1)水的循环。
(2)珍贵的水资源。
(3)节约用水与水资源保护。
【拓 展】
冰箱中的物态变化
冰箱冰室内的霜大部分来自冰箱外空气中水汽(水蒸气),至少夏季如此。当然,冰箱中的食物等也可能蒸发一部分水蒸气。因为冰室里因温度较低,水分警惕性的量并不很大。可是不断开、关冰室门时,暖湿空气带进来的水蒸气却很可观。可以看到,开门稍久,冰箱表面即有霜生成。进一步观察还会发现,冰室内即使不放任何东西,只要经常开启冰箱门。夏天的冰室内也会结起厚厚的霜层,但不开门则无霜层。因此,平时宜少开冰箱门(特别严重是夏季),否则霜层过厚,不仅使冰室容量减小,而且冰雪导热率低,使冰箱致冷效率降低,增加能源消耗。
【思考】冰箱内的霜的形成过程属于何种物态变化?
【解析】冰箱内的霜通常是由于水蒸气凝华形成的。由于冰箱内的温度较低,打开冰箱门,外面温度较高的水蒸气进去后突然遇到低温条件,就会凝华成小冰晶,如果形成的小冰晶过多,就会形成霜层。
七年级上册课件(篇2)
1. 积累“朗润”、“酝酿”、“卖弄”、“宛转”、“烘托”等词语。理解词语在文中的含义。
2. 能流畅地朗读全文,理清文章思路。
3. 揣摩文章抓住景物特点运用准确、生动的语言及比喻、拟人、排比等修辞方法描写景物的写作方法。
揣摩文章抓住景物特点运用准确、生动的语言及比喻、拟人、排比等修辞方法描写景物的写作方法。
一、创设情景,导入新课。
1. 导入语:
师:同学们,如今已是秋风萧瑟,夜凉如水,站在秋天里怀想春天应该别有一番滋味吧?百花争艳,莺歌燕舞不知拨动了多少人的心弦,成就了多少名篇佳作。你知道哪些描写春天的诗词?
师:同学们积累的诗句可真不少,春天真的是美不胜收。那么,在朱自清的眼中,春天又是怎样的呢?接下来,我们就一起走进朱自清的《春》,和他一起欣赏春天的美丽。
朱自清(1898-1948)原名朱自华,字佩弦,江苏扬州人。现代散文家、诗人、学者、民主战士。19北京大学哲学系毕业。作品有:散文《浆声灯影里的秦淮河》、《背影》、《荷塘月色》等名篇。
《春》大致写于1928年至1937年,朱自清在写此文时,已经没有初期创作诗文时的那种淡淡的哀怨的情调,而是鲜明地表现出新鲜的格调和欢快的情绪。在大自然中,他发现了美和希望,于是欣喜万状,写下了著名的散文精品《春》,反映了他对 美的追求,对光明的向往,表达了他对未来的希望,流露了积极进取的精神。
3.检查预习,学习字、词 。
Yùn niàng liáo chēng suō lì xī shū dǒu sǒu cháo
酝 酿 嘹亮 撑 伞 蓑 笠 稀 疏 抖 擞 安巢
二、整体把握文章。
1.配乐齐读课文,朗读时注音语气、语速、语调及重音的把握,要求学生带着问题听读课文。
2.这样美丽的春色,作者是按什么顺序描写的?是先写什么,再写什么,最后写什么的呢?
文章是按“盼春”-“绘春”-“赞春”来写的,请同学们划分出来.
本课可以分为三个部分:
第一部分:(1)总写--盼春。表达出人们对春天的盼望和兴奋喜悦的心情。
第二部分:(2-7)具体写--绘春。把景物和感受结合,全面细致地描绘出春景图。
第三部分:(8-10)总写--颂春。赞美春天,点出了春天的特点:新、美、健。
3.文章重点描绘的是哪部分?(绘春)那作者绘春的那几幅图呢?
4.师:你觉得哪幅图最美?其实每一幅图都有它的精彩之处,老师最喜欢春花图,那么,我们就以春花图为例,来学习怎样欣赏写景散文吧!
三、精读课文,体会妙处 。
1.齐读春花图段落,体会妙在哪里,美在哪里。
这段抓住了春花的什么特征?用了哪些表现手法?(板书:特征,手法)
生:桃树,杏树,梨树,你不让我,我不让你,都开满了花赶趟儿。红的像火,粉的像霞,白的像雪。花里带着甜味儿,闭了眼,树上仿佛满是桃儿、杏儿、梨儿。
师:大家赞成吗?我们一起来读读这几句话。这里运用了哪些修辞手法?
生:运用拟人的修辞,生动形象的写出了花多的特点。
生:运用比喻的修辞手法,写出花的颜色多,艳丽。
师:那么作者看到这样美的景色,他心情会怎么样?(高兴)那我们读的时候要用喜悦的语气来读,我们一起来体会一下作者的喜悦吧!
生齐读。
师:这部分除了采用修辞手法之外,还有没有别的?思考一下。
生:多种感官。比如,颜色是视觉,甜味儿是嗅觉,蜜蜂是听觉。(板书:多种感官)
生:侧面烘托。花下成千成百的蜜蜂嗡嗡地闹着,大小的蝴蝶飞来飞去。(板书:侧面烘托)
师:这句话中有个字用得特别好,哪个字啊?(闹)好在哪里?
生:表面写声音,其实是衬托花多,美,艳的特点。
2.师小结:这段文字运用的表现手法有比喻,拟人,排比的修辞手段,侧面烘托,多种感官结合,虚实结合等手法,将春花多,美,艳的特征写得淋漓精致,我们在写景作文中,也要学习作者的这些表现手法。
3.再齐读这一段,感受春花的美和作者的喜爱之情,要有感情的朗读。
五、合作探究,揣摩语言。
1.找出其他部分中自己喜欢的段落或者语句,来赏析一下。
生四人小组讨论,师巡视。
生:第9段,春天像小姑娘,花枝招展的,笑着,走着。这句话运用拟人的修辞手法,写出了春天的娇美。
生:第3段,小草偷偷地从土里钻出来,嫩嫩的,绿绿的。这句话中动词用的好,写出了小草的顽强生命力。
师:把“小草偷偷地从土里钻出来”换为“小草一下子从土里生出来”,体会其表 达效果有何不同。哪个好?
“钻”和“偷偷”用得好,说说好在哪里?
“钻”既表现春草冲破土层的挤劲,又用“偷偷地”修饰,形容它不知不觉地出现,生动地表明春草的活力
生:第6段,看,像牛毛,像花针,像细丝,密密的斜织着,人家屋顶上全笼着一层薄烟。运用比喻的修辞,写出雨丝多,细,密的特点。
生:第1段,盼望着,盼望着,东风来了,春天的脚步近了。运用拟人的修辞手法,写春天来了。
师:这句话写出了作者盼春的急切心情,要读出急切的语气来,另外,还有春天来了的欣喜感受,这句话要读出欣喜来。我们一起来读一读。
师:那么为什么作者在描绘春草图中要穿插这些小孩的画面呢?
提示:小草和小孩子具有哪一个共同点呢?(小,说明他们都处在生命中最富有生气,最活泼的时期,这个时期的生命力最为旺盛。)
在春草图中,作者将小草的画面和小孩子的画面组合在一起,也就是将两个最富有生命力的景象组合起来,交相辉映,使得整个春草图显示出了一派生机勃勃的景象。
这节课我们跟着朱自清欣赏了美丽的春天,品味了优美的语言,写作时,如果我们也注入真情,注意语言,多用修辞,我们的文章也会生机盎然的!
1.背诵课文。
盼春(1) 特点 手法
绘春(2-7) 春风图 多种感官
[朱自清《春》教学设计(人教版七年级上册)]
七年级上册课件(篇3)
(一)导语设计
运用钢琴曲的优美旋律去撞击学生心灵,营造一种轻松愉悦的学习氛围,同时适时导入,让学生在美的愉悦感受中走进这篇哲而美的散文佳作。
(二)朗读课文,感知课文内容。
这个大的环节中又包含以下几个小的环节
1、教师配乐范读这个设计沿袭导语而来,同时又是承接下边各个环节。因为学生既在教师范读中畅游了思绪,又解决了一些疑难字词。在这一环节结束,再设置问题,让学生说出应重点掌握的字词,这样,在对佳作初步感知的基础上又完成了基础知识的掌握。
2、学生用自己喜欢的方式自读课文,教师设置问题,解决问题。问题的设置是这样的。
课文中写了那些人?要求用不同的表述来介绍。这个问题的设置正是学生深入课文后的不同感受体验。
课文写了一件什么事?这个问题考察学生对课文的整体感知情况。
根据文中语句分析出谁是这个家庭真正的决策者?
这个问题是让学生更加深入研读文章的一个环节,学生所找答案必然围绕“我”如何解决散步分歧展开。这样学生解决这个问题后,教师再点处这就是中年人的责任,本文所设难点不攻自破。一个完美的结局点染了尊老爱幼这个不置可否的主题。到此为止,学生已经感受到了是浓浓的爱撑起了家庭的一方晴空。从而铺设了学生人生体验的桥梁。教师顺势倒入下一环节。即联系自己的生活实际,以小组为单位,谈谈发生在自家的充满亲情的平凡而感人的小事。学生会再此环节中畅所欲言,交流亲情体验,加深对文本的解读,升华自己的情感价值观。
第三个大的环节品读课文美点寻踪
在这个环节中,将激趣----学法点拨------品读------交流相融合,并且向学生出示了何谓美点寻踪,这样学生带着明确的目的对文章进行赏读,不同层次的学生都能做到有的放矢。
第四个环节
让学生把这一节课的收获谈出来,老师给了一个提示例句,同学仿说,各抒己见,表达真情实感。
第五个环节作业写一篇日记,题目《记录点滴真情》
最后一个环节小结
在总结过程中点拨以小见大的写作手法,再把本课主题进一步拓展,让学生珍爱自己的亲人,珍爱自己的生命。对学生进行情感渗透。
出示板书
希望各位领导和老师多多批评和指正。
七年级上册课件(篇4)
孟子:老吾老、幼吾幼
“哺育子女是动物也有的本能,赡养父母才是人类的文化之举。这个,全世界数中国人做得最好。”
--培根
亲情流淌
家是黑夜里的北斗,我是在北斗星光引航下的一片孤舟。
家是________ _______, 我是________ _______。
感受生活
幸福的家庭是美好的温馨的,幸福家庭的生活细节也渗透着浓浓的亲情,传达着深切的关爱。它不仅在莫怀戚的家中,它也在我们每一个人的家中,在我们每一个人的心中。
请你描述温馨的生活瞬间!
课后寄语:
如果爱是左右手
就该一只递给孩子,
一只递给老人;
如果爱是左右手
就该一只递给朝阳,
一只递给晚霞;
如果爱是左右手
就该一只递给早春,
一只递给晚秋;
如果爱是左右手
就该一只递给未来,
一只递给历史。
七年级上册课件(篇5)
七年级上册生物课件
课题:
调查我们身边的生物
教学目标
1.知识方面
了解校园或周边的主要生物的分布特点,知道生物对环境具有一定的适应性,并能影响环境。
2.能力方面
初步学会调查的基本方法,培养学生主动获取知识的能力。
3.思想情感方面
通过调查活动激发学生学习生物学的兴趣,培养学生热爱校园、热爱周边、热爱大自然的情感。
教学重点和难点:
初步学会调查的基本方法,了解校园或周边的主要生物是本章的重点。
组织好学生进行有目的、有计划的调查活动是本章的难点。
教学过程设计:
1.教学过程的设计思路:
(1)从周边或校园的生物引入调查;
(2)举例说明调查的基本方法;
(3)分组,教师指导制定调查计划;
(4)实施计划,教师组织指导;
(5)汇报、总结、交流、评议。
2.教学过程
(l)联系实际,引入课题。
本章的教学课题可以从周边和校园的生物引入。在此可以设计一些问题引起学生的'共鸣:①你知道我们北京市的市树和市花吗?②我们的校园中有多少种生物?这些生物开花结果吗?它们的花期是几月?
(2)关于调查的基本方法和意义:
①利用录像或投影向学生介绍一些有关科学家进行科学调查的资料,利用投影向学生演示调查活动的范例,从而让学生了解什么是调查,调查的目的、方法和步骤。
②讲解学生记录的方法,强调在活动的过程中如实做好记录的重要性。
如向学生讲清在调查前要制定好调查记录表,随时记录下观察的内容。如生物的种类、数量、生活环境、用途等。在活动中要尽量多地收集所需要的数据和资料,以便调查结束后对调查结果进行准确的分析并把调查内容撰写成调查报告。
③向学生强调调查的意义,切忌将调查作为游玩。
教育学生在活动过程中要有意识地培养自己一丝不苟的科学态度,把活动作为对自己的挑战去发挥自己最大潜能的机会,从而发挥自己的主动精神。
(3)分组,制定调查计划,为实践活动打下基础。
①建议将班内同学按自愿结合的方式分成若干小组(5~6人一组)。由组长专门负责,制定调查计划。
②可以到学校附近的公园、小花园、生活小区或街道等地去调查。也可以在校园内进行调查。最好选择一条动、植物种类多且有不同生活环境的路线。
③调查的内容力求多样化。
班内的不同小组可以调查不同的内容,各有侧重点。如可以调查园艺花卉生物、蔬菜粮食作物,也可以调在城市的行道树种类等。
(4)实施计划。在课余时间在教师的指导下完成。
①认识调查地段的生物的种类、数量、生活环境、用途等。
②确定的调查路线边走边观察并及时记录下来:身边有哪些生物?它们生活在什么环境中?与生物生活在一起的有哪些动物?树上有鸟巢吗?有病虫害吗?花丛中有蜜蜂、蝴蝶飞舞吗?
要注意观察生物的分层现象,不仅观察高大的乔木、灌木,还要注意观察草本生物和藤本生物。不仅观察高大的生物类群,还要观察一些微小的生物类群,如阴湿树干上的菌类、生活在水中的藻类等。
③教育学生要注意人身安全,要爱护公共场所的花草树木,不要任意攀折花木,尤其要爱护身边的珍稀生物。
④调查限定在几天之内完成。如对生物特别有兴趣的同学可以设立小专题,作进一步的调查。
(5)分析调查结果,撰写调查报告。把调查记录归纳管理,通过查阅资料、访问等形式对调查的内容进一步的充实和完善。
(6)总结、交流、汇报。调查结束后可以与本班的板报小组合作,布置展览,将各小组的调查报告、收集来的图片资料等筛选展出,作班内交流。
板书设计
调查我们身边的生物
一、调查的基本方法和意义。
二、分组,制定调查计划。
七年级英语上册课件收藏11篇
每个老师在上课前会带上自己教案课件,就需要老师用心去设计好教案课件了。教案是学生自主学习和教师引导学习的重要实践,有没有好的教案课件可资借鉴呢?趣祝福小编精心挑选了这篇文章它的标题为“七年级英语上册课件”,欢迎你来品鉴本文!

七年级英语上册课件(篇1)
人教版七年级上册英语课件
Unit12 My favorite subject is science课件.rarUnit12 My favorite subject is science课件3.rarUnit12 My favorite subject is science课件2.rarUnit11 What time do you go to school课件.rarUnit11 What time do you go to school课件3.rarUnit11 What time do you go to school课件2.rarUnit10 Can you play the guitar课件.rarUnit10 Can you play the guitar课件3.rarUnit10 Can you play the guitar课件2.rarUnit9 Do you want to go to a movie课件.rarUnit9 Do you want to go to a movie课件3.rarUnit9 Do you want to go to a movie课件2.rarUnit8 When is your birthday PPT课件.rarUnit8 When is your birthday PPT课件3.rarUnit8 When is your birthday PPT课件2.rarUnit7 How much are these pants课件.rarUnit7 How much are these pants课件3.rarUnit7 How much are these pants课件2.rarUnit6 Do you like bananas PPT课件.rarUnit6 Do you like bananas PPT课件2.rar
Unit5 Do you have a soccer ball课件.rarUnit5 Do you have a soccer ball课件2.rarUnit4 Where's my backpack PPT课件.rarUnit4 Where's my backpack PPT课件2.rarUnit3 This is my sister PPT课件.rarUnit3 This is my sister PPT课件2.rarUnit2 Is this your pencil PPT课件.rarUnit2 Is this your pencil PPT课件2.rarUnit1 My name's Gina PPT课件.rar
七年级英语上册课件(篇2)
人教版英语七年级上册
Unit7 How much are these socks?
Section A(1a-2e)湛江市霞山职业高级中学 蔡景茜
一、教材分析
本节课是新目标英语七年级上册unit 7 How much are these socks?第一课时,以Shopping为主线,通过对本课的学习,让学生学会用英语谈论服装的颜色、尺寸和价格,学生运用所学语言,模拟在商场售货和购物。教学内容简单且富有生活情趣,有利于激发学生的参与意识和好奇心理。
二、教学目标 1.知识目标:
词汇:掌握有关服装、尺寸和颜色的单词 句型:(1)--How much is …?--It’s….(2)--How much are …?--They’re….2.能力目标:学会询问价格及使用购物用语
3.情感目标:树立节约用钱合理消费的正确消费观念 学习重点:学会使用询问价格的句型,并能正确回答 学习难点: 区分服装的单复数
三、学情分析
抓住七年级学生活泼、好动、好胜心强的特点,引进小组竞争机制,倡导其参与活动。在教学中努力营造宽松、民主、和谐的教学氛围,鼓励他们大胆尝试,保护他们的自尊心和积极性。
四、教法分析
1.情景引入法:利用多媒体创设情景,引入新知识,吸引学生注意力,使他们对即将学习的新知识产生好奇。2.听说法:对目标语言进行反复操练,以达到灵活运用的目的。
3.任务型教学法:设计一系列的任务活动,让学生在完成任务的过程中掌握目标语言。
五、学法分析 1.分组合作学习。
2.‚为用而学,用中学,学了就用‛:本课时的目标语言是询问物品的价格,与学生实际生活联系紧密,所以应该充分利用创造的情景和实物给与学生练习英语口语的机会。
六、教学过程 Step1 Warming up Show a picture T: I’m very happy these days because Nov 11 online shopping carnival is coming soon.I want to buy a lot of clothes.Can you help me put them into the shopping cart? 【设计意图】通过双十一购物狂欢节引入新课,使学生在欢快自然的气氛中不知不觉进入教学,激发他们的兴趣和热情,活跃课堂气氛,并为本课任务的开展做热身准备。Step 2 Presentation 1.Present the new words about the picture of a sweater T: Look!What’s this?
Ss: It’s a sweater.In the same way, learn the other new words about clothes.Match the words with the things in the picture, and then check the answers together.2.Present the words about size: big, small, long, short.3.Present the words about colors.4.Present the monetary unit of yuan and dollar 【设计意图】通过大量的图片引入,直观地呈现新单词,能吸引学生的注意力,活跃学生的思维,激起学生的求知欲,让学生在真实的语境中理解单词。Step 3 Listening 1.Listen to the conversations and circle the things you hear, and then check the answers.2.Listen again and fill in the price tag, and then check the answers.【设计意图】通过师生互动的方式,引导学生看书上的六幅插图,听音圈物品,核对答案;再听录音,填价签,通过这项操练,锻炼学生获取信息的能力,在听力中使用目标语言,为下一个任务做准备。Step 4 Practice 1.Present the new sentence patterns: ‚How much is /are…? It’s/They’re …‛
2.Get the students to practice the dialogues in pairs.【设计意图】通过呈现询问价格的句型,让学生总结‚How
much is / are…? It’s / They’re…‛ 的特点:单数用is ,复数用are,并通过结对操练加以巩固。Step 5 Read and act 1.Let the students try to fill in the blanks in the conversation, read and act it out.2.Translate the sentences into English.【设计意图】通过补充对话中所缺的单词和句子,进一步熟悉购物时所需的交际用语,为下一任务做准备。Step 6 Consolidation Scene play: Thanksgiving Day is coming, please buy some clothes for your friends.【设计意图】通过‚shopping‛这个生活平台,学生不仅可以在愉快的氛围中运用本节课所学询问价钱等语言,而且使学习的过程变得生动有趣,这一活动将课堂气氛推向高潮。Step 7 let’s be a doctor Get the students to correct some wrong sentences.【设计意图】通过易错点的呈现和改正,学生能更好地掌握知识点。
Step 8 Summary and Homework 1.Summarize what we have learned in this lesson 2.Homework: write a dialogue about shopping 【设计意图】通过鼓励学生小结本课的收获,培养他们自主学习的习惯。本作业与本节课的教学目标相匹配,既帮助学生巩固了已学语言材料,又提高学生写作的能力。
教师用一长一短的pants和shorts呈现long和short,用一大一小的sweater呈现big和small, 并让学生跟着老师做手势。
[教学思路] 通过猜图游戏引入,能吸引学生的注意力,活
跃学生的思维,激起学生的求知欲,使学生能愉快地参与课堂活动,用实物和肌体语言,直观地呈现big,small , long and short等形容词,让学生在真实的语境中理解单词。Show some pictures, get the students to practice the new sentence patterns: ‚How much is / are…? It is / They are…‛ Step3、教授、练习新句型,完成活动1c 将dollar与人民币单位yuan相比较,注意dollar的单复数变化。
此环节中结合图片设计师生对话、结对活动、小组活动等任务,让学生分小组竞赛,练习巩固新句型。在练习的过程中,将重点句型How much is it?发散为How much are they?重点掌握单复数在此句型中的变化。Step4.综合运用
How much is that red hat? It’s 6 dollars.How much are your white trousers?
They are 10 dollars.加大句子难度继续操练,巩固新词汇和句型。
此环节将表示颜色的形容词带入操练句型中,并结合学生穿的毛衣、裤子、身边的尺子、书包、铅笔、橡皮擦擦等物品让学生自己编对话。
Step5、总结回顾
1、词汇:T-shirt, sweater, skirt, jacket, socks, shoes, trousers, shorts
2、句型:--How much is this T-shirt?--It’s 7
dollars.--How much are these socks?--They are 2 dollars.Homework: Ask about prices of your friend’s clothing, and write down your conversations.询问你朋友衣物的价格,并将你们的对话写下来。Step6、板书设计
Unit 7 How much are these socks?(Section A 1a ~2d)Clothing jacket A: How much is this T-shirt? a pair of socks B: It’s seven dollars.two pairs of trousers A: How much are these socks? Shorts shoes skirt sweater
B: They are two dollars.(一)教材分析
本节课是义务教育课程标准实验教科书英语新目标‚Go for it‛七年级上册unit 7 How much are these pants?的第一课时。本节课是新课引入,教学内容和教学重点就是通过学习section A(1a—2c),认识并初步掌握谈论衣物,询问价格这一情景中的运用。教学内容简单且富有生活情趣,有利于激发学生的参与意识和好奇心理,更主要的是学生通过对本课的学习,让学生学会用英语谈论服装的颜色和价格,学
生运用所学语言,可以模拟在商场售货和购物。第一课时的引入在整个单元中起到了抛砖引玉的作用,同时也是一座桥梁,是正确引导学生由说到写的第一步。因此,本节课的教学重点就落在反复熟练地运用语言上,通过大量的口头交际,为第二课的教学做好扎实的准备。
(二)教学目标
根据新课标的教学理念,从素质教育的要求出发,结合本课的教学内容和学生的语言水平,本节课的核心任务是让学生学会用英语谈论服装的颜色和价格,并可以模拟在商场里售货和购物。学生要达到以下五个目标:
语言知识目标:掌握本课书的重点词汇、语言结构。
语言技能目标:学会谈论衣服的名称,颜色和价格。
情感态度目标:通过创设人文情景,学生亲自感受和体验,使语言学以致用,激发学生的学习积极性,培养他们的自主学习,合作学习,善于学习的习惯,并让他们在实践活动中体验成功。
学习策略目标:能对所学内容主动练习和实践,提高合作意识和自主学习能力。
文化意识目标:培养学生实际运用英语能力,使学生进一步
明白语言也是文化,扩展他们的文化视野,增强他们的跨文化交际的意识和能力。学生上完本节课后,学会用英语谈论服装的颜色和价格。
(三)学生分析
①初一学生有着学习英语的浓厚兴趣和愿望,乐于参与多种调查、采访、表演等实践活动。到学期后段,学生已具备了一定的英语基础,并在unit 5 Do you have a soccer ball?和unit 6 Do you like bananas?中进行过有关调查活动、设计过野炊菜单、外出活动安排表;有过寻宝、建立俱乐部、给父母准备生日礼物等英语实践活动的体验。
②本班大部分学生有较为明确的英语学习动机和积极主动的学习态度,能积极和他人合作,相互帮助,共同完成学习任务。有不少学生表达较艰难,因此,在位置安排上,应把他们平均分配到各组,让好的学生带动他们学习,设计任务时应易到难、难易适中,教师在活动过程中经常跟他们交流,给予帮助和鼓励。
(四)设计理念
为了每位学生的发展是课程改革的核心。在本课中一共设计了三个任务:‚从认识物品‛到‚谈论价格‛,再到‚现场购物‛实现了由浅入深,由已知到未知,由知识向能力的过渡,让学生在活动中学英语。同时也着重于能力的培养和思维的
扩展,如小组合作能力、口头表达能力等。通过作业的布置,使课堂内外任务相随,能有效提高学生的英语水平,特别是培养学生的语言运用能力和动手能力。
孩子们是教育的重要资源、是动力之源、能源之库。本节课主要依靠学生,让学生进行自主学习,由于孩子们爱表现自己,通过现场购物这一任务,让孩子们学会创新、学会配合,连成绩不好的孩子也会大大方方地说上几句英语,这一活动将课堂气氛推向最高潮,孩子们学到了知识,急于即时运用。让孩子们在实际语言材料中感知,在课堂上享受着学习的快乐。
(五)教学过程
根据任务型教学模式,我将教学过程设计如下:
Step 1 Warming up
(Two minutes)
1、Sing an English song.2、Greetings.Who is wearing yellow today? Yellow today , yellow today.Who is wearing yellow today? Yellow today.①Black
②White
Green
⑤Blue
③Red
④[教学思路]通过Sing a song of color 引入新课,使学生在欢快自然的气氛中不知不觉进入教学,激发他们的兴趣和热情,活跃课堂气氛,并为本课任务的开展做热身准备。
Step 2 Presentation
(Seven minutes)
1、present the new clothing words.T: Boys and girls , I thought LingShui is very hot.But today it is cold , you see , I am just in a blouse now.I feel so cold.What should I do ? Oh, I must go to the shop to buy some clothes.教师布置任务:What am I going to buy ? Can you guess?
学生回答:毛衣∕裤子。
(逐渐展示毛衣的完整图片)
T:Oh!It is a sweater.Read after me ‘‘sweater‛.Ss: ‘‘Sweater‛.(Then show another picture with a boy and a woman come to the clothes shop ,What are they going to buy ?Can you guess?)
T:(Pointing to the boy)
What is LiLei going to buy ?
Ss: 裤子、短裤、短袜和鞋子。
T: Excellent!He is going to buy pants, shorts, socks and shoes.Read after me ‘‘pants ,shorts, socks and shoes‛.Ss:
‘‘Pants , Shorts, Socks and Shoes‛.T:
(Pointing to the woman)
What about his Chinese teacher Miss Li ?
Ss: She is going to buy a sweater and a T—shirt.T: It is very clever of you to say so!
2、Present: big , small, long, short.教师用一长一短的pants和shorts呈现long和short,用一大一小的sweater呈现big和small, 并让学生跟着老师做手势。
[教学思路] 通过猜图游戏引入,能吸引学生的注意力,活跃学生的思维,激起学生的求知欲,使学生能愉快地参与课堂活动,用实物和肌体语言,直观地呈现big,small , long and short等形容词,让学生在真实的语境中理解单词。
Step 3 practice and present‚How much is /are…? It is/They are …‛。(Six minutes)
1、教师先通过多媒体呈现短裤、男衬衣、毛衣等图片,鼓励学生说出相应物品的名称,由复习衣物名称导入How much is/are ……? It is /They are 等句型。
T:(Pointing to the sweater)What is this in English ?
Ss: It is a sweater.T: What color is it ?
Ss: It is red.T: How much is the red sweater ?
Ss: …(学生可能不知所云,教师快速点击鼠标,一张8元人民币的价签已挂在毛衣上。)
T:It is 8 Yuan , Read after me ‚It is 8 yuan‛.Ss:‚It is 8 Yuan..‛
T:You are so intelligent , and I think it is 3 dollars.(教师快速点击鼠标,挂上3美元的价签,从而引出生词dollar.)
教师教读几遍后,快速在裤子、短袜、鞋等服装上挂上价签,反复让学生练习How much is…? It is…的句型。
2、教师通过多媒体呈现两件挂有7美元价签的pants和三件挂有9美元价签的shorts问学生,由教‚How much is…? It is…‛过度到教‚How much are…? They are…‛.T:How much are these pants?
Ss:They are seven dollars.学生回答时可能想不到dollar需加s ,教师可通过dollar 与 yuan的货币学习,讲解人民币和美元的不同写法及用法,并简单介绍汇率的概念。
[教学思路]通过鼓励学生说出相应的衣物名称引出目标语言‚How much is are…?It is / They are…,‛产生信息沟,学生有交流的动机和兴趣,兴趣是最好的老师,在新课
呈现时,以兴趣为出发点,通过图片及信息沟激发学生的兴趣。同时,在特定的语境中引出生词dollar ,做到了‚词不离句‛让学生有意义地学习单词。
Step 4 Group work(Six minutes)
①T:I like shopping very much.Do you like shopping? Now come with me to the clothing shop again.Go over how to say them in English and how to buy them.Boys and girls , are you ready? Ss:Ok.T:This is a sweater.(学生重复说a sweater ,并用手拼写sweater.)
T:What color is it?
Ss:It is red.(并用手拼写red)
T:How much is the red sweater?
Ss:It is eight dollars.通过实物图,教师提问,学生集体回答,由单数名词到复数名词,反复操练新句型。
②Then , students play a guessing game:
T:How much is the red sweater /are the white shoes ?
Can you guess?
Ss:Is it /Are they 3 dollars?
T:No , it is / they are move expensive / cheaper.Well done!You are right.[教学思路]利用多媒体动画,给学生提供明确,真实的语言信息,把表示衣物名称、颜色、大小、长短的新单词和句型‚How much is / are…? It is / They are…‛融合在一起进行操练。接着,考虑到学生有一定的基础,如果单纯看图机械操练,虽使用了target language ,但学生兴趣不大,仍是无意义操练,于是设计了‚猜衣物价格‛游戏,极大地调动了学生的积极性和主动性,也使本课教学目标中的重、难点得到进一步的巩固。
Step 5 Listening(Seven minutes)1、1c练习对话
先让学生齐读1c,接着让学生分组角色,变换角色,反复运用衣物名称、颜色、大小、长短的新单词和句型进行自由操
练,然后教师检查几组同学的操练情况,目的是保证他们能正确而迅速地说出新语言,最后总结句型‚How mach is / are…? It is / They are…‛ 的特点:单数用is ,复数用are.2、2a,听对话,圈出你听到的物品。3、2b,再听一遍录音并填写价签。
[教学思路]通过师生互动的方式,引导学生看书上的六幅插图,复习服装名称及‚How much is / are…?‛句型,然后听音圈物品,核对答案;再听录音,填价签;第三遍听录音,写出对话中衣物颜色及名称的单词,通过这项操练,锻炼学生获取信息的能力,在听力中使用目标语言,为下一个任务做准备。
Step 6 Consolidation(Ten minutes)
任务活动:赠送生日礼物
教师创设情景:今天是Ann的生日,她的几位好朋友要去购买服装、鞋帽作为礼物送给她,5分钟内,看哪小组购买的服装最经济实惠。学生从小组为单位,模拟在商场购物。
①教师先和一名学生一道示范对话。
②学生四人一组,自己编对话表演,教师巡视帮助解决困难。
③成果汇报以给过生日的同学赠送生日礼物的形式呈现,并评出最佳小组。
[教学思路]通过‚shopping‛这个生活平台,学生不仅可以在愉快的氛围中运用本节课所学询问价钱等语言,而且使学习的过程变得生动有趣,这一活动将课堂气氛推向最高潮。
Step 7 Summary and Homework(Three minutes)
①先以小组为单位进行讨论,总结出这节课有什么收获,学会了什么,作自由发言。
②教师呈现本节课的重点内容。
③在布置家庭作业时,教师设计了一个简单的书面练习,课后写一段购物活动中的对话,以巩固本节课的语言知识。
④教师用一句Are you happy ? 来了解学生在这节课上开心与否来做为评价方式,让学生在愉快的气氛中结束学习。
[教学思路]通过鼓励学生小结本课的收获,培养他们自主学习的习惯。本作业与本节课的教学目标相匹配,既帮助学生巩固了已学语言材料,又提高学生写的能力。
七年级英语上册课件(篇3)
Unit 1 Topic 3 How old are you ?
1.学习以短文形式谈论姓名、年龄、学校、班级和电话号码等个人信息
2、预习课本P23 Part 2 ,分别找出Jane 和 Huang Hua 的个人信息
(三)问题导学 再看课本P22 Part 2 ,回答问题。
Where is Jane from ?__________________________
How old is she ?___________________________
What class is she in ? _____________________
Where is Huang Hua from ? _______________
What’s his English name ? _____________________
Are they in the same class ? ______________
1、They are not in the same class ,but they good friends.
他们不在同一个班,但是他们是好朋友。
解析:same 意思是“相同的”,前面一定要用定冠词“the”,后面接单数名词。
but 意为“但是,可是”,起转折作用。
eg : We are in the same school ,but in different classes . 我们在同一个学校,但是在不同的班级。
1、---How old ________ you ?
2、----I ________ ten .
3、---What _____ this ? -
4、---It _________ a pen .
5、----Who ________ that ?
----She _________ Lucy .
6、---What _________ these ?
----They ________ schoolbags .
7、---__________ this a pen ?
----Yes , it _________ .
1.What’s that _______ Chinese ?
2.Is he ____________ English boy ?
3、These are my _____________.
4、---Is this your eraser ? ----Yes ,____________.
5、They are not ________ the same class ,but they
are good friends .
1.They are in the s________ class .
2、--How o________ is she ? ---She is 15.
3.Li Ming and Wang Fei are good f___________.
4、I’m in a h_________ school .
5、Is your p__________ number 3264-7853 ?
1、______ is Zhou Lan ._________ phone number is 1358429764.
A、Her , her B、She , her C、She , She
2、What grade ______ your brother in ?
3、---Is that a car ? ---No ,____________
A、that isn’t B、that is C、it isn’t
4、Nine and eleven is __________.
5、_________ are good friends .
A、you ,he and I B、I ,you and he C、you and he ,I This is an English boy(男孩). His name is Jim. He is twelve. He is in my school. He and I are in the same grade. I’m in Class Three, Grade Seven, but he is in Class Four. I’m his good friend. He is my good friend, too. 根据短文内容, 补全对话。
A: Excuse me, what’s his name?
A: 6. ______________________________
B: 7. ______________________________
B: 8. ______________________________
A: Is he in your school?
B: 9. ______________________________
A: Is he in Class Three, Grade Seven?
B: 10. ______________________________
He is in Class Four, but he and I are good friends.
汉译英:1.布朗是他的姓氏。 Brown is his ____ ____.
Is that ____ ____.
13.它们是五辆公共汽车。
They are ____ ____.
14.让我帮帮你吧。
Let ____ ____ you.
15.给你。 ____ ____ are.
(五) 作业:请写一份自我介绍,内容包括姓名、年龄、国籍、班级、学校、电话号码。
七年级英语上册课件(篇4)
教师:准备游戏时所用的图片(食物、蔬菜、动物)。 学生:准备表演时所需道具(服装、假发)。
Step One :Present the sentence patterns.
1. Play a game “How many words do you know?”(利用小游戏调 动学生的积极性,同时通过对冠军的介绍引出本课。)
Teacher: After the study of the first three starters, I think most of the students must have known a lot of words. How many
words do you know? Let’s play a game to see who know? Let’s play a game to see
who knows the most.
(Divide all the students into several groups and show a picture to them with the computer. Every group can choose two students to join. They are asked to come to the blackboard and write down the words in 30 seconds.) (Group 2 is the champion group. They can write 11 words.) 2. Introduce the champion group to the class.(引课方式贴近生活,学生易于接受)
Teacher: Congratulations, now Group 2 is the champion. But I don’t know your names. Would you like to introduce yourselves to us? S1& S2:Yes.
S1:Hello.My name is Li Lei. Nice to meet you. Ss: Hello, Li Lei. Nice to meet you ,too. Ss: Hello! What’s your name? S2:I’m Sun Ping. How do you do? Ss: How do you do ? Step Two: Drills.
1. Make introductions.(通过句型的操练使学生更加熟练掌握所学 的.句式。)
Teacher: The new term begins. Everyone will meet many new classmates. Do you want to make friends with them? If your answer is “yes”, please introduce yourself in your group. Example:
Sa: Hello! I’m Li Lei. What’s your name? Sb: My name’s Zhang Feng. Nice to meet you.
Sa: Nice to meet you, too. And what’s your name, please? Sc: Lin Li. How do you do? Sa:How do you do?
2. Listen and number the conversations.
Teacher: Today I have good news for you. Three new students will come to our class. They are from other countries. Do you want to know them? Let’s listen to the recording of 1b in Section A.
(Students listen to the tape and give the right answers.) Step Three: Make friends.
1. Make new friends.(用谈话的方式完成任务,生动活泼,同时更 容易向学生进行美德教育。)
Teacher: Now everyone has some new friends. Do you want others to know them? Do you want more friends? Let’s introduce our new friends to others, OK? Ss: OK. Example:
Sa: This is my new friend. His name is Sun Nan. Sb: Hello, Sun Nan. Nice to meet you.
Sc: Nice to meet you, too. Look! This is my new friend. Her name is He Lu. Ss: How do you do? Sd: How do you do?
(Students can stand up and introduce their friends to others freely. They can greet each other warmly. Everyone in the class can have more friends. They can also know something else about them.)
2. The New comers.(以表演的形式完成,使课堂气氛达到高潮。)
Teacher: Just now I said three new students from other countries would come to our class. Now, look! They are here. Let’s give them a warm welcome.
(Three “foreign” students come in and all the students clap warmly.)
Teacher: It’s their first time to come to China. Would you like to listen to their introductions? Ss: Yes.
(Three students can make introductions and act out the dialogue vividly.) Step Three: Sum up.
Some students are asked to sum up this lesson. It is how to make new friends and how to greet them. It is very important in the daily life. Homework
“How do you meet new visitors at home?
教师:准备歌曲磁带(歌词)、情景图片及上课所需表格。 学生:需要向父母了解自已名字的含义。
Step One: Revise the sentence patterns.
1. Sing an English song.(用唱歌的方式既带动了气氛,又复习了 所学内容。) Teacher: Yesterday we’ve known each other already. Do you remember your new friends’ names? If you do, let’s sing the song “What’s your name?”. Hello! Hello! What’s your name? My name’s Gina. Hello! Hello! What’s his name? His name’s Peter. Hello! Hello! What’s her name? Her name’s Anna.
2. Listen to the conversations and finish the exercises.
Teacher: Yesterday I made a new friend. Her name is Jenny. She is very lovely. She introduces many friends of hers to me. Do you want to know about them? Let’s listen to the tape and find out some useful information.
(Students listen to the tape and give the right answers.)
3. Act out the dialogues.(在特定的情景下表演对话更符合实际, 更贴近生活。) Teacher: Now you’ve known something about introductions and greetings. But if you are in other places, how do you introduce yourself and greet others? Look at the four pictures and imagine you are in such a situation, how do you get to know new friends?
(Students can choose any picture they like and act out the dialogues.) Example:
Sa: Hello! I’m Lucy Green. What’s your name?
Sb: My name is Kate Brown, Jim’s classmate. Nice to meet you.
Sa: Nice to meet you, too. I’m Jim’s sister. Welcome to Jim’s birthday party. Make yourself at home. Sb: Thanks, I will.
Step Two: Choose English names.
1. Play a name game.(有效引出“英文名字”这一主题。)
Teacher:As we know, everyone has a name. Each name has its special meaning and so do English names. Do you want to have an English name? If you do, let’s play a name game. The winners of the game will get English names.
Rules: Every student should introduce himself or herself,but at the same time he (she ) should repeat all the above-mentioned classmates' names. Example:
S2: His name’s Tony. My name’s Linda.
S3: His name’s Tony. Her name’s Linda. My name’s Nick.
S4: His name’s Tony. Her name’s Linda. His name's Nick. My name's Kim. S5:??.
2. Choose English names.
1).Find out first names and last names.(用小组的方式完成名字的识别。)
Teacher: Congratulstions to the winners. Now you choose English names from the box. But before you choose names, you must know English names have two parts: first name and last name. Look at the box, can you classify them according to the demands?
Jenny Gina Alan Mary Jim Tony Tom Bob Mike Green Miller Jack Smith Brown Linda Nick Kim Hand
教师:准备所需的歌曲磁带、名片样本及各项表格。 学生:制作名片所需的纸张、画笔等。
Step One: Present the English numbers.
1. Sing the song “Ten Little Indian Boys”.(歌曲欢快有趣,比起单纯教授单词更
为有效。) Teacher: During the first two classes, we’ve known something about new friends names. But if we want to contact them. What shall we do? S1: A telephone call.
T: But you don’t have their telephone numbers. S1: Ask for their telephone numbers.
T: If we want to know about their telephone numbers, we must learn how to say these numbers in English. Let’s learn to sing “Ten Little Indian Boys”.
One little, two little, three little Indisns, Four little, five little, six little Indians, Seven little, eight little, nine little Indians, Ten little Indian boys.
(After singing the song, tell the students not to forget “zero”.) T: Count the number together from zero to nine. S2: Zero? 2. Listen to the conversation and write the telephone number.(通过听力复习单词。)
Teacher: This is my friend’s telephone number. But I can’t hear it clearly. Could you please help me write it down?
(Students listen to the recording of 1b in Section B and give the answer.) Step Two: Drills.
1. Make a survey about your partners’ telephone numbers.(调查组内成员的电话号码,重点练习所学句式。)
Teacher: Thank you for your help. But do you want to know your friends’ telephone numbers? Now let’s make a survey about it and try to fill in the chart. Name Telephone numbers Li Lei Liu Yu Lin Fang Yin Kailin S1: Hello, Liu Yu. What’s your telephone number? S2: My telephone number is ?
S1: Oh, thank you. What about yours, Lin Fang? S3: It’s?
S1: ? And may I know your phone number, Yin Kailin? S4: ?
S1: Thank you very much. Oh, I nearly forgot. My telephone number is? 2. Report it to the class.
(After the survey, every group can choose a student to report the survey result to the class.) Example: My telephone number is? Liu Yu’s phone number is? Lin Fang’s telephone number is? Yin Kailin’ s phone number is?
3. Listen and match the names and telephone numbers.(制作电话号码簿这一任务能
Teacher: I will play the recording twice. The first time just listen. The second time, write the letter of the person’s telephone number in the space after that person’s name.
T: Next, I’ll play the recording again. This time, fill in the missing numbers. (Students listen to the tape again .)
T: Can you find out whose telephone numbers they are ? S:?
4. Make an address book.
Teacher: The new term begins. Our class needs an address book to contact each other. Now we can put all the information together and then we can have our own address book. Pay attention to the address book headings “Names” and “Phone numbers”. Now work in groups of six and ask your group members “What’s his /her name? And What’s his/her phone number?” Step Three: Make an ID card.
1. Show some different ID cards to the class and try to enjoy them.(向学生展示
不同种类的名片,一方面开阔学生眼界,一方面便于学生找出名片所含内容。)(引导学生有效搜集名片上的信息,提高学生的阅读能力。)
Teacher: Now our class has a very useful address book. We can use it to talk with others on the phone. But for most adults, ID cards are more important because they are easy to take along. What’s more, they are very enjoyable. Sometimes they can show the owners’ special personalities. Look at the ID cards below and try to enjoy them.
Teacher: From the cards above, what can you find out ? S1: It must have a person’s name? S2: Sometimes it has a motto.
T: Yes, It must have a person’s name, postcode, telephone number, home address and e-mail address. So if you have a chance to make an ID card, you must think about all the above. But before you make your card, first let’s learn how to get information from the card. It’s very important.
2. Read the ID card and answer the questions.(提供参考信息,但允许学生创新。) Teacher: Look! Here’s an ID card of my friend’s. Please look at it and find out some useful information about her. FIRST NAME: Jenny LAST NAME: Brown TELEPHONE NUMBER: 535-2375 1. What’s her telephone number? 2. What’s her family name? 3. What’s her first name?
七年级英语上册课件(篇5)
电子课件就是全部输入在电脑中的,通常也都是教师自己上课所背的内容。这里讲的教案与传统上的有很大的不同,下面为大家分享了七年级上册英语的电子课件,欢迎借鉴!
1.学习本课的知识点:
(2)单词:blue,green,red,yellow,black,white,brown,purple,co lor,UFO,CCTV
(3)句型:
—What's this/that?
—It's ...
—What color is it?
—It's ...
2.使学生能运用所学英语,正确地描述物体的颜色。
3.对学生进行美育教育,从小培养他们对美的正确认识。
熟练掌握Ss—Zz八个字母的大小写形式和颜色的表达方法。
这一部分的Guessing game主要是为了让学生从不完整的画面中通过想象,猜出其是什么字母,既复习学过的字母,又丰富学生的想象力。而“What's this?It's ...”既是前一单元的重点句型,也是下一课时使用频率较高的一个句型。我们在游戏的最后用同样的方式引出本堂课所要教授的新字母的小写形式。
For example:
The teacher shows a part of a letter and asks:
Get the students to answer the question like this:
Then show the whole of the letter to let the students check whether they're right or wrong.
导入新课What color is it?
通过字母卡片,复习前面学到的字母及交际用语。
让同学们拿着卡片互相问答。
教师用红色粉笔在黑板上写“A”,询问学生:
The teacher answers himself/herself: It's red.
教师使用不同颜色的粉笔在黑板上写下字母Aa—Rr,让同学们一个接一个地读出来,教师问:
Ss:It's red.(Help the students to answer.)
导入新课 What color is it?
建议3:
T:Good morning,boys and girls.
Good morning,A.
Good morning,B.
(Greet as many students as possible individually.)
T:What color are your clothes?
T:Good.Now please ask and answer questions with your partner about the color of your clothes.
导入新课 What color is it?
Step 2:Present the new letters and words
1.教师通过多媒体呈现一组本课要学习的字母图片,并且每张字母图片颜色不一样,让学生以小组为单位进行辨认。教师可采取竞赛的方式来调动学生的学习积极性。
For example:
T:Look at these pictures.Let's play a game.Who can say these letters and the colors as quickly as possible?If you can,you will be the winner.Now let's begin.
Get some students to ask each other about letters and colors in English,and then do 1a:let the students write the letters for each color.The teacher can offer some help.
2.读一读表示颜色的单词,然后把颜色与对应的单词连起来。
T:They are the names of colors.Draw them on the blackboard or show them on the screen.Now please read after me.You should pay attention to your pronunciation.
Let's match the words with the colors.
建议:
教学过程中我们可以设计一个任务型活动为顺藤摸瓜。在学生学习了有关颜色的词汇后,作为拓展,向学生介绍几个新的表示颜色的词汇,如:dark/light green,orange,pink。这几个词较常见,也很实用。然后通过顺藤摸瓜的游戏加以巩固。具体操作为:
准备10个乒乓球,乒乓球染成10种不同的颜色,然后将10个乒乓球放在一个开口的纸盒子里。上课时,教师找一个学生背对着大家,放音乐,音乐一开始,大家就开始传盒子,音乐一停,手拿盒子的同学马上拿出一个球举起。问控制音乐的同学 “What color is it?” 他猜:“It's red.”。若猜对了,大家说yes,控制音乐的学生继续放音乐;如果大家说“No,it's blue.”,控制音乐的学生下台,由刚才拿球的学生来控制音乐。游戏继续,直到乒乓球在不同学生手里。可以多练几次,让学生充分掌握表示颜色的单词。
该活动参照击鼓传花的游戏而创造。可操作性强,学生积极性也高。能让学生在不知不觉中掌握表示颜色的单词。
1.教师让学生听1b部分的录音,通过听力训练操练所学的新句型。
具体操作建议是:第一遍 让学生只是听,第二遍让学生听并跟读,然后教师让学生进行操练,先学生齐读,然后把学生分成组齐读,最后让个别学生读。通过这种从整体到部分再到个体的机械操练,让学生掌握本课所学的新句型。
2.教师板书并强调What question 句型。
A:What color is it? B:It's red.
A:What color is it? B:It's black.
1.让学生先按照课本的内容练习,建议前后位互问,同位互问,一生随意选择另一学生互问,尽量采取多形式从多角度练习,让更多 的人参与进来。
2.Pa ir work:Let's look at the pictures below.Can you ask and answer questions about the colors?Now work in pairs.Ask your partner about the letters in the pictures.
3.脱离课本,让学生根据身边的事物进行问答,或者用彩笔在白纸上随意写出学过的字母进行问答。
建议1:先复习前面两个单元学过的字母,再过渡到本节课要学习的新字母。
For example:
Please look at the letters.Let's practice saying the letters Aa—Rr in order.
Aa,Bb,Cc,Dd,Ee,Ff,Gg,Hh,Ii,Jj,Kk,Ll,Mm,Nn,Oo,Pp,Qq,Rr
Good.Look at the letters in 2a.They are letters Ss—Zz.Let's listen and repeat them.Pay attention to the pronunciation of the long /i?/sound in T and V and the short /e/ sound in S and Z.The /v/ sounds in V doesn't exist in most Chinese dialects.You should pay special attention.You can't say that like /veI/ or /weI/./zi?/is American English and is also acceptable.
OK.Let's listen and repeat them.
建议2:
1.第一遍让学生只是听,第二遍让学生听并跟读,然后教师让学生进行操练,先学生齐读,然后把学生分成组齐读,最后让个别学生读。通过这种从整 体到部分再到个体的机械操练,让学生掌握本课所学的新字母。
2.教师出示一些带有字母的卡片,并涂上颜色,让学生任意抽取一张,读出字母和表示卡片颜色的单词。为了培养学生的竞争意识,也可以让学生以组为单位进行比赛,每个组选一名代表,看哪个组读得准,读得响亮。
Look at the letters in 2b.They are not arranged alphabetically.Now listen to the tape and number the letters in order,and then read them aloud.
仔细观察2c中字母大小写书写格式,并抄写。教师仔细观察同学们的书写情况,针对存在的`问题及时在黑板上反馈。
建议1:教师在黑板上画出四线格,先演示给同学们看。
建议2:利用投 影仪,以动态的形式展示给同学们看。
根据大写字母写出小写字母,根据小写字母写出大写字母,必须使用四线格。
写完之后找同学读一读,再次巩固字母的读音。对于书写比较漂亮的同学,教师将其书写投影,供大家学习,同时也能激励大家认真书写。
建议:这个游戏叫“非常接触”。在活动前先向学生介绍字母大小写的规则。通过活动——非常接触加以巩固。以每一排为一组,将全班分成若干组,教师分别发给每组最后一排的学生一张纸片,上面写有一个字母,只允许这个学生看这个字母,在教师说“开始”后,最后一排的学生即用手指把纸片上的字母写在前面学生的背上……这样依次进行下去,最后第一排的学生把所传的字母写到黑板的四线格上,传得最快最准确的组获胜。
这一部分并不一定要学生掌握这些缩略词的完整的拼法,主要是为了让学生了解可以运用学过的大写字母来表示一些常见的缩略词或缩写形式。老师也可以补充一些常见的缩略词。
For example:
T:Have you seen these abbreviations?Do you know what they stand for?Now let's look at the pic tures and abbreviations and discuss in groups.
1.小组讨论,展示答案。
2.展示各小组课前收集的缩略词,看看哪组收集得多。
3.教师在屏幕上多展示一些缩略词,让同学们多了解一些。
本课我们主要学习了red,white,yellow,black等表示颜色的单词,S—Z八个字母的读音及大小写形式,还学习了“What color is it?It's red.”两个句型。难点是准确而熟练地描述物体的颜色。在第二课时的学习中我们会继续使用这两个句型进行语言交际。
1.把Ss—Zz八个字母的大小写形式每个写5遍。
2.制作彩色字母卡片,并在卡片上写出本节课学习的句型。
1.What color is it?它是什么颜色的?
【用法透析】该句型结构为“What color +be +名词(代词)+?”用来问某物是什么颜色。
这是对颜色进行提问的特殊疑问句。what是疑问代词,可放在名词前修饰说明名词(color),该句的主语是it,所以动词用单数is,若主语是复数的,则动词用are。该句答语为“It's/They're+颜色.”
2.It's black.它是黑色的。
【用法透析】it是代词,指代前面所提到的东西或人。
【误区警示】注意:its易与it's混淆。it's是it is的缩略式,意思是“它是”,用时要注意以下几点:
①在句首时it's 和it is 两者可以通用。例如:
It's/It is a pen.它是一支钢笔。
That is a car.It's an English car.那是一辆汽车,它是一辆英国生产的汽车。
②作肯定回答时,在Yes之后只能用it is,而不能用it's。如:
—Is this a pen?这是只钢笔吗?
Starter Unit 3 What color is it?
blue,green,red,yellow,black,white,brown,purple,color
What color is it?
It's red...
七年级英语上册课件(篇6)
初一年是初中的起始年段,是小学到初中的转折阶段,务必打好语音基础,学会科学地背单词,整体地理解句子,领会中西语言结构的不同。
语音基础,包括音标和字母,26个字母先学会,48个音素中的元音音素20个,其中单元音12个先学会。然后在第二个课时学会辅音音素中的10个成对出现的音素。希望能在第一个星期完成音标音素的学习。
第二周开始进入第一单元的学习。(还是在学习音标的同时学习音素?)
第一单元,主题是交朋友,topic 1是welcome to China. 功能是问候,介绍和说再见。理解be动词的用法。Topic 2是where are you from?功能是谈论名字,出生地和电话号码;语法是学会疑问句what/ where/ who的表述,理解人称代词的主格。Topic 3是How old are you ? 谈论年龄,班级,年级,辨认物品。语法还是学习疑问句what/ how,代词a/an的用法,名次的复数形式(plural)。
第二单元Unit 2, 主题是谈论外貌特征。Topic1是I have a small nose. 功能是描述外貌(appearances),语法学习一般现在时have/has的用法。Topic 2 是What does she look like? 功能是描述外貌、服饰、颜色,语法是wh-questions. Topic3 是Whose cap is it? 功能是谈论物品的归属性。语法是物主代词(possessive pronouns), 特别注意名词性物主代词(the possessive case of nouns)。
第三单元Unit3,主题是getting together,朋友家人的团聚。Topic 1 Does he speak Chinese?功能是学会发出请求(making requests), 交朋友(招待朋友), 表达爱好。语法是学习人称代词,以及一般现在时like / want/ speak 的用法。Topic 2 What does your mother do? 功能是谈论职业,说明家人的职业外貌等特征。语法是疑问句,学习work-worker单词的变形,一般现在时do/ does的用法。Topic3What would you like to drink? ,功能是一起吃饭,发出建议或请求。
第四单元Unit 4,主题是having fun, 一起玩得很高兴。 Topic1What can I do for you?功能是购物,谈论重量,以及发表建议。语法是疑问句how much/ how many的区别,some与any 的区别,可数名词与不可数名词。Topic2 Would you like to cook with us? 功能是打电话,邀请别人,发出建议,语法是复习一般现在时。Topic3是What time is it now?功能是谈论时间,谈论日常互动,语法是时间的表达。
虽然内容简单,但是对于初一部分没有真正学过英语的孩子来说是很难的。因此,要注意语言与功能相结合,提升学生的学习兴趣,提高学习效果。
本学期将继续关注以阅读与作文相结合的课堂一体化教学,使得学生养成英语阅读的习惯。有必要印发短小的英语文章,每周两篇,还是以新概念英语第一册做为辅助?
对学生的要求如下:1.课堂积极发言。2.做好课堂笔记。3.每篇课文要背诵。(利用微信群发到群里让大家一起听)4.单词小测要100分。错一个抄20遍。5.抄单词每个一行,每行8个单词或字母。
七年级英语上册课件(篇7)
guitar, sing, swim, dance, chess, play chess, draw, speak, speak English, join, club
能掌握以下句型:
① —Can you play the guitar? —Yes, I can./ No, I can't.
② —What can you do? —I can dance.
③ —What club do you want to join? —I want to join the chess club.
2. 情感态度价值观目标:
该部分内容贴近学生的生活,谈论的话题是能力。通过互相询问或谈论自己或对方在某一方面的能力,可以培养学生的一种群体意识。
1. 教学重点:
1) 学习询问和谈论彼此的能力和特长;
2) 掌握一些弹奏乐器的表达方式。
2. 教学难点:
1. 教师可携带一些易于演奏的乐器,也可带一些演奏乐器的图片,一边演示乐器,一
边说: I can play the guitar.…等;再指着图片说:He/She can play the violin.But I can’t play it.等;然后询问学生:Can you play the guitar?….并引导学生进行简单的回答。
2. Ss look at the picture in 1a. Then read the words and phrases. Let Ss match the activities
with the people.
Then Check the answers with the class together.
出示一些反映各种活动的图片、幻灯片或播放课件,引导学生谈论活动:
He/She can dance/swim/sing/“··But I can’t dance/swim/sing/...等,学习表达活动的`动词短语。
T: Tell your partners what you can do. For example:
I can play the guitar. I can sing and dance.
Ss work in groups. The let some Ss talk to their classmates in front of the class.
1. T: Now let’s listen to the tape, find out the right conversation, and number them 1-3. (播放lb部分的录音让学生听,引导学生根据所听到的内容,选出对话的顺序,
1. Ask the Ss to practice the conversations in 1b with a partner. Then make their own conversations.
(引导学生展开Pairwork活动,完成lc部分口语交际的教学任务,学会运用can询问和表达能力。)
1. Work on 2a;
T: Now, look at the pictures on P2, listen to the four conversations. Just listen.
(Play the recording for the first time, students only listen carefully.)
Then, listen to the recording again, and circle the clubs you hear.
Check the answers with the class.
2. Work on 2b;
引导学生根据对话内容用正确的单词填空,补全对话,再播放听力材料一遍。让学
生进行校对,练习听力和写作能力,完成2b部分的教学任务。
Check the answers with the Ss.
1. Look at 2b and talk about what the people can do and the clubs they want to join.
老师可以和一名优秀的学生做一个对话的例子,让学生们明白如何去问答,例如: T: What club does Lisa want to join?
S1: She wants to join the chess club.
2. Ss work in pairs to practice asking and answer about Lisa, Bob and Mary.
3. Ask some pairs to act out their conversations.
1. Ask Ss to look at the picture in 2d. Then Ss read the dialogue by themselves and try to
find out the answers to these questions.
① What club does Bob join?
② What club does Jane join?
Ss read the conversation by themselves and find the answers to the questions. Then check the answers:
① Bob joins the soccer club.② Jane joins the English and art club.
2. Explain something that Ss can't understand.
3. Let Ss read after the teacher or play the recording and let Ss read after the recording.
4. Ss work in pairs to act out the conversation.
5. Ask some pairs come to the front of the classroom. They try to act out the conversation. See which group is the best.
Homework:
1. Remember the new words and expressions after class.
2. Recite the conversation after class.
3. Write English names as many as possible in the exercises book.
七年级英语上册课件(篇8)
教师:准备游戏时所用的图片(食物、蔬菜、动物)。
Step One :Present the sentence patterns.
1. Play a game “How many words do you know?”(利用小游戏调动学生的积极性,同时通过对冠军的介绍引出本课。)
Teacher: After the study of the first three starters, I think most of the students must have known a lot of words. How many words do you know? Let’s play a game to see who know? Let’s play a game to see who knows the most.
(Divide all the students into several groups and show a picture(图片略)to them with the computer. Every group can choose two students to join. They are asked to come to the blackboard and write down the words in 30 seconds.)
(Group 2 is the champion group. They can write 11 words.)
2. Introduce the champion group to the class.(引课方式贴近生活,学生易于接受)
Teacher: Congratulations, now Group 2 is the champion. But I don’t know your names. Would you like to introduce yourselves to us?
S1:Hello.My name is Li Lei. Nice to meet you.
Ss: Hello, Li Lei. Nice to meet you ,too.
Ss: Hello! What’s your name?
S2:I’m Sun Ping. How do you do?
1. Make introductions.(通过句型的操练使学生更加熟练掌握所学的句式。)
Teacher: The new term begins. Everyone will meet many new classmates. Do you want to make friends with them? If your answer is “yes”, please introduce yourself in your group.
Example:
Sa: Hello! I’m Li Lei. What’s your name?
Sb: My name’s Zhang Feng. Nice to meet you.
Sa: Nice to meet you, too. And what’s your name, please?
Sc: Lin Li. How do you do?
2. Listen and number the conversations.
Teacher: Today I have good news for you. Three new students will come to our class. They are from other countries. Do you want to know them? Let’s listen to the recording of 1b in Section A.
(Students listen to the tape and give the right answers.)
1. Make new friends.(用谈话的.方式完成任务,生动活泼,同时更容易向学生进行美德教育。)
Teacher: Now everyone has some new friends. Do you want others to know them? Do you want more friends? Let’s introduce our new friends to others, OK?
Sa: This is my new friend. His name is Sun Nan.
Sb: Hello, Sun Nan. Nice to meet you.
Sc: Nice to meet you, too. Look! This is my new friend. Her name is He Lu.
(Students can stand up and introduce their friends to others freely. They can greet each other warmly. Everyone in the class can have more friends. They can also know something else about them.)
2. The New comers.(以表演的形式完成,使课堂气氛达到高潮。)
Teacher: Just now I said three new students from other countries would come to our class. Now, look! They are here. Let’s give them a warm welcome.
(Three “foreign”students come in and all the students clap warmly.)
Teacher: It’s their first time to come to China. Would you like to listen to their introductions?
(Three students can make introductions and act out the dialogue vividly.)
Some students are asked to sum up this lesson. It is how to make new friends and how to greet them. It is very important in the daily life.
“How do you meet new visitors at home?
教师:准备歌曲磁带(歌词)、情景图片及上课所需表格。
Step One: Revise the sentence patterns.
1. Sing an English song.(用唱歌的方式既带动了气氛,又复习了所学内容。)
Teacher: Yesterday we’ve known each other already. Do you remember your new friends’names? If you do, let’s sing the song “What’s your name?”.
Hello! Hello! What’s your name? My name’s Gina.
Hello! Hello! What’s his name? His name’s Peter.
Hello! Hello! What’s her name? Her name’s Anna.
2. Listen to the conversations and finish the exercises.
Teacher: Yesterday I made a new friend. Her name is Jenny. She is very lovely. She introduces many friends of hers to me. Do you want to know about them? Let’s listen to the tape and find out some useful information.
(Students listen to the tape and give the right answers.)
3. Act out the dialogues.(在特定的情景下表演对话更符合实际,更贴近生活。)
Teacher: Now you’ve known something about introductions and greetings. But if you are in other places, how do you introduce yourself and greet others? Look at the four pictures and imagine you are in such a situation, how do you get to know new friends?
(Students can choose any picture they like and act out the dialogues.)
Sa: Hello! I’m Lucy Green. What’s your name?
Sb: My name is Kate Brown, Jim’s classmate. Nice to meet you.
Sa: Nice to meet you, too. I’m Jim’s sister. Welcome to Jim’s birthday party. Make yourself at home.
Step Two: Choose English names.
1. Play a name game.(有效引出“英文名字”这一主题。)
Teacher:As we know, everyone has a name. Each name has its special meaning and so do English names. Do you want to have an English name? If you do, let’s play a name game. The winners of the game will get English names.
Rules: Every student should introduce himself or herself,but at the same time he (she ) should repeat all the above-mentioned classmates' names.
S2: His name’s Tony. My name’s Linda.
S3: His name’s Tony. Her name’s Linda. My name’s Nick.
S4: His name’s Tony. Her name’s Linda. His name's Nick. My name's Kim.
2. Choose English names.
1).Find out first names and last names.(用小组的方式完成名字的识别。)
Teacher: Congratulations to the winners. Now you choose English names from the box. But before you choose names, you must know English names have two parts: first name and last name. Look at the box, can you classify them according to the demands?
Step One: Present the English numbers.
1.Sing the song “Ten Little Indian Boys”.(歌曲欢快有趣,比起单纯教授单词更为有效。)
Teacher: During the first two classes, we’ve known something about new friends names. But if we want to contact them. What shall we do?
T: But you don’t have their telephone numbers.
S1: Ask for their telephone numbers.
T: If we want to know about their telephone numbers, we must learn how to say these numbers in English. Let’s learn to sing “Ten Little Indian Boys”.
One little, two little, three little Indisns,
Four little, five little, six little Indians,
Seven little, eight little, nine little Indians,
Ten little Indian boys.
(After singing the song, tell the students not to forget “zero”.)
T: Count the number together from zero to nine.
2.Listen to the conversation and write the telephone number.(通过听力复习单词。)
Teacher: This is my friend’s telephone number. But I can’t hear it clearly. Could you please help me write it down?
(Students listen to the recording of 1b in Section B and give the answer.)
1.Make a survey about your partners’ telephone numbers.(调查组内成员的电话号码,重点练习所学句式。)
Teacher: Thank you for your help. But do you want to know your friends’ telephone numbers? Now let’s make a survey about it and try to fill in the chart.
S1: Hello, Liu Yu. What’s your telephone number?
S2: My telephone number is …
S1: Oh, thank you. What about yours, Lin Fang?
S1: … And may I know your phone number, Yin Kailin?
S1: Thank you very much. Oh, I nearly forgot. My telephone number is…
2.Report it to the class.
(After the survey, every group can choose a student to report the survey result to the class.)
Example:
My telephone number is… Liu Yu’s phone number is… Lin Fang’s telephone number is… Yin Kailin’ s phone number is…
3.Listen and match the names and telephone numbers.(制作电话号码簿这一任务能够大面积调动学生装的参与意识。)
Teacher: I will play the recording twice. The first time just listen. The second time, write the letter of the person’s telephone number in the space after that person’s name.
T: Next, I’ll play the recording again. This time, fill in the missing numbers.
(Students listen to the tape again .)
T: Can you find out whose telephone numbers they are ?
4.Make an address book.
Teacher: The new term begins. Our class needs an address book to contact each other. Now we can put all the information together and then we can have our own address book. Pay attention to the address book headings “Names” and “Phone numbers”. Now work in groups of six and ask your group members “What’s his /her name? And What’s his/her phone number?”
some different ID cards to the class and try to enjoy them.(向学生展示不同种类的名片,一方面开阔学生眼界,一方面便于学生找出名片所含内容。)(引导学生有效搜集名片上的信息,提高学生的阅读能力。)
Teacher: Now our class has a very useful address book. We can use it to talk with others on the phone. But for most adults, ID cards are more important because they are easy to take along. What’s more, they are very enjoyable. Sometimes they can show the owners’ special personalities. Look at the ID cards below and try to enjoy them.
Teacher: From the cards above, what can you find out ?
S1: It must have a person’s name…
S2: Sometimes it has a motto.
T: Yes, It must have a person’s name, postcode, telephone number, home address and e-mail address. So if you have a chance to make an ID card, you must think about all the above. But before you make your card, first let’s learn how to get information from the card. It’s very important.
2.Read the ID card and answer the questions.(提供参考信息,但允许学生创新。)
Teacher: Look! Here’s an ID card of my friend’s. Please look at it and find out some useful information about her.
1. What’s her telephone number?
2. What’s her family name?
3. What’s her first name?
1.Students are asked to make ID Cards of their own.
Demands: A. Useful information must be included.
B. It can be designed as beautifully as possible.
C. Students may show their own personalities if possible.
2.Find out the information about the famous person.
Step One: Make an ID card show.
the ID cards to the students.
Teacher: Yesterday all of you made some beautiful ID we’ll make a show here. Let’s enjoy it together and try to choose the best ones.
2.Find the owner of the card.
Teacher: The ID card show is over. All the cards are mixed together. I can’t find the owners. Who can help me?
S1:I can.(Show one of the cards to another students.)
S1:Excuse me, are you in ...?
S1:What’s your telephone number?
(Teacher asks more students to find the owners of ID cards).
1.Play a guessing game.
Teacher: ID cards are useful. But some persons’names are known to all the people.They are very famous. Now look at the pictures and guess their names.
(The teacher shows some famous person’s pictures and students guess their names and give their answers.)
llect useful information.
Teacher: These persons are very famous. But it’s better for us to know something else about them. Before class you’ve been asked to collect some information. Now let’s exchange it together.
3.Report it to class.
Each group can choose a student to give a report about their favourite person. The other students can ask him some questions in class.
Example:
S1:This is Michael Jordan. He’s years old. He’s... He speaks...His birth place is ... He is a famous ...player. He’s a member of six Chicago Bulls championship teams.
People like to call him “Air Jordan”.
S2:Do you like Michael Jordan? Why or Why not?
S1:Yes, I like him very much because he’s so ...
S2:Do you want to be a basketball player like him?
S1:Of course I do. That’s my dream.
Step Three: Make a poster about yourself.
Teacher: Do you want to be famous all over the world?
First you must learn to show yourself. Now you have a chance to do that. Please try to make a poster about yourself. In your poster you should try to introduce yourself.
(Students can write a passage about themselves. They can give some personal information. They can alse design the poster as well as they can.)
Students are asked to sun up this unit, especially about how to talk with others politely.
七年级英语上册课件(篇9)
2.了解有关超市的知识。
3.初步认识美元。
4。 初步学习美英人士购物时所用的度量衡。
5.学会谈谈自家附近的超市。
教学用具:
录音机,实物投影仪,图片或实物等。 如有条件搞一份麦当劳或肯德基的菜单。
听录音并跟读第116课第一部分和第二部分。让几个同学在全班示范,看谁模仿的最好。可给一些生词让学生试着读一读,看看他们本课语音掌握的如何。
值日生Duty Report。
让值日生事先准备一有关超市的短文,在Duty时在全班讲,为新课做好铺垫。
引出今日新单词:all day The shopkeepers in this shop work hard all day。
a lot of The supermarket has a lot of things。
This shop sells a lot of things。
This supermarket is open from 9 a。m。 to 9 p。m。
This shop is open at 9 a。m。 and is closed at 9 p。m。
market On Saturdays and Sundays the markets are full of
people。
教单词过程当中,尽量把课文中的句子重复几遍。为下一步听课文做好铺垫。
1。 老师可先复述课文,让学生们了解main ideas,然后让学生们听录音,提醒他们不看书。
2.也可让学生们先看书一分钟,然后听录音。
3.听完第一遍时,可让学生先做几道判断题,一下几题供参考。
如:
( ) 1。 A big supermarket is near my home。
A。 Yes B。 No C。 The text doesn’t tell us
( ) 2。 It has no name。
A。 Yes B。 No C。 The text doesn’t tell us
( ) 3。 It sells a lot of things, almost everything。
A。 Yes B。 No C。 The text doesn’t tell us
( ) 4。 If you want to buy “house”, does the supermarket sell?
A。 Yes B。 No C。 The text doesn’t tell us
( ) 5。 All things in the supermarket are not expensive。
A。 Yes B。 No C。 The text doesn’t tell us
( ) 6。 The supermarket is open 12 hours a day。
A。 Yes B。 No C。 The text doesn’t tell us
( ) 7。 All the shopkeepers are friendly。
A。 Yes B。 No C。 The text doesn’t tell us
用投影仪打出,供学生们练习。
4.听第二遍,回答书上的问题。
5.听第三遍,复述,可把书上问题的答案连起来,成为一篇复述的短文。
6.编对话。
给出一情景:同学A,B去逛超市,想买些小礼品送给美国的笔友。
7.读课文。
8.谈谈自家附近的超市或农贸市场(Free Market),并写成书面的文字。
老师可根据班上同学的水平,酌情增减内容。
1.学习116第四部分。
2.新单词:dollar one dollar is equal about 8。3 yuan。
如有条件,可那一张真的美元或英镑让学生可看一看。
步骤同Step 3。
3.把对话写成书面文字。
用麦当劳肯德基的菜单或Workbook P147 Menu编一对话。
你只有15元如何吃一顿物美价廉的午餐。
New Words: all day a lot of open market dollar
It has a lot of things。 This supermarket is open from 9 a。m。 to 9 p。m。 pound
语言技能:listening,talking and writing
提示词语及句型:
basketball volleyball medicine box English book corner
Do you have a pen / a pencil-sharpener / a ruler / doll / English book / story book?
Yes, I do。 / No, I don’t。
How much is it? / are they? It’s / They are…yuan。
Here you are。
Here is the money。 Thank you。
I want to buy…
操作过程:
1。 老师布置任务:同学们把集中闲置的物品如:学习用品、生活用品、玩具、和书籍等带到学校。
2.老师把课堂虚拟成一跳蚤市场,把同学们带到学校的物品都表上价格,大件2元,小件1元。
3.同学们可购买自己喜欢的或需要的物品,整个买卖过程用英语完成,现金交易。
4.所得款项,可归个人也各用作班费。
语言技能:listening,talking and writing
提示词语及句型:
How much is our class fees?
What do we buy with this money?
We can buy something that we all like。
What about buying a basketball?
I don’t agree to buy … because it’s no use。
I think we should buy a …, because it is very useful to everyone。
操作过程:
1.小组讨论班费的用法。共有班费208元。小组每位成员谈谈对班费用法的看法。(每位组员应事先作一番调查,看看班上同学都想买什么东西,并准备好发言)
2。 每位成员必须发言,阐明自己的观点,并说明理由。
3.每组找一位同学代表发言,看那一组买的东西物美价廉,符合同学们的心意。
4.把本组的讨论结果写成一书面材料交给老师,并;评出《班费最佳利用方案》。
语言技能:listening,talking and writing
提示词语及句型:
traditional(传统) food in Spring Festival
What’s in it?
There is meat and all kinds of vegetables。
操作过程:
可用以课外活动时间,并实现准备好一些画片,正面画画,背面写单词。
1。 老师布置任务:一“老外”要买中国的传统食品“饺子”,但又不知怎么说,根据这一情景编一对话。
3.模拟一主食厨房,用以大纸盒里面放些画片。编对话。对话应10组AB以上。内容包括:老外描述“饺子”的外形、味道和售货员向老外介绍“饺子”特点、食用的方法等。
4.对话编好后,请几组同学在全班展示,看那一组最精彩。
5.老师可随意在找一组同学,抽一画片,即兴编对话。
语言技能:listening,talking and writing
提示词语及句型:
mineral,(矿物质) nutrition,(营养) vitamin,(维生素) crisp and tasty (又香又脆), tasty refreshing (爽滑可口),health food (保健食品) promote sales(促销)
操作过程:
1。 一顾客想买一保健食品,你向他介绍了最近新研制的一种方便面。
2.小组讨论如何向顾客介绍这种面。介绍内容有:这种面含有多种营养,生吃又香又脆,煮着吃爽滑可口,而且久煮不烂,只比普通同的方便面贵一点点,每袋只售5元。现在正在促销。
3.每组都派一位代表推销自己的产品。
4。 听了的介绍,看那一组卖出的面最多。
语言技能:listening,talking and writing
1。 班上一同学生病住院,老师想派几位同学去看望,打算从班费总抽出50元买些礼品。让同学们讨论一下,这50元钱买些什么。
2.四人小组中讨论50元钱买什么,每人阐明自己的观点,说明理由。
3.每组推选一代表,宣讲本组的观点,竞争“上岗”争取老师派你们组去。
4.老师根据每组的演讲,看那一组买的东西物美价廉,就派这一组去看生病的同学。
七年级英语上册课件(篇10)
课前准备
教师:准备游戏时所用的图片(食物、蔬菜、动物)。
学生:准备表演时所需道具(服装、假发)。
教学设计
Step One :Present the sentence patterns.1.Play a game “How many words do you know?”(利用小游戏调动学生的积极性,同时通过对冠军的介绍引出本课。)
Teacher: After the study of the first three starters, I think most of the students must have known a lot of words.How many words do you know? Let’s play a game to see who know? Let’s play a game to see who knows the most.(Divide all the students into several groups and show a picture(图片略)to them with the computer.Every group can choose two students to join.They are asked to come to the blackboard and write down the words in 30 seconds.)
(Group 2 is the champion group.They can write 11 words.)
2.Introduce the champion group to the class.(引课方式贴近生活,学生易于接受)
Teacher: Congratulations, now Group 2 is the champion.But I don’t know your names.Would you like to introduce yourselves to us?
S1& S2:Yes.S1:Hello.My name is Li Lei.Nice to meet you.Ss: Hello, Li Lei.Nice to meet you ,too.Ss: Hello!What’s your name?
S2:I’m Sun Ping.How do you do?
Ss: How do you do ?
Step Two: Drills.1.Make introductions.(通过句型的操练使学生更加熟练掌握所学的句式。)
Teacher: The new term begins.Everyone will meet many new classmates.Do you want to make friends with them? If your answer is “yes”, please introduce yourself in your group.Example:
Sa: Hello!I’m Li Lei.What’s your name?
Sb: My name’s Zhang Feng.Nice to meet you.Sa: Nice to meet you, too.And what’s your name, please?
Sc: Lin Li.How do you do?
Sa:How do you do?
2.Listen and number the conversations.Teacher: Today I have good news for you.Three new students will come to our class.They are from other countries.Do you want to know them? Let’s listen to the recording of 1b in Section A.(Students listen to the tape and give the right answers.)
Step Three: Make friends.1.Make new friends.(用谈话的方式完成任务,生动活泼,同时更容易向学生进行美德教育。)
Teacher: Now everyone has some new friends.Do you want others to know them? Do you want more friends? Let’s introduce our new friends to others, OK?
Ss: OK.Example:
Sa: This is my new friend.His name is Sun Nan.Sb: Hello, Sun Nan.Nice to meet you.Sc: Nice to meet you, too.Look!This is my new friend.Her name is He Lu.Ss: How do you do?
Sd: How do you do?
(Students can stand up and introduce their friends to others freely.They can greet each other warmly.Everyone in the class can have more friends.They can also know something else about them.)
2.The New comers.(以表演的形式完成,使课堂气氛达到高潮。)
Teacher: Just now I said three new students from other countries would come to our class.Now, look!They are here.Let’s give them a warm welcome.(Three “foreign”students come in and all the students clap warmly.)
Teacher: It’s their first time to come to China.Would you like to listen to their introductions?
Ss: Yes.(Three students can make introductions and act out the dialogue vividly.)
Step Three: Sum up.Some students are asked to sum up this lesson.It is how to make new friends and how to greet them.It is very important in the daily life.Homework
“How do you meet new visitors at home?
Period Two
课前准备
教师:准备歌曲磁带(歌词)、情景图片及上课所需表格。
学生:需要向父母了解自已名字的含义。
教学设计
Step One: Revise the sentence patterns.1.Sing an English song.(用唱歌的方式既带动了气氛,又复习了所学内容。)
Teacher: Yesterday we’ve known each other already.Do you remember your new friends’names? If you do, let’s sing the song “What’s your name?”.Hello!Hello!What’s your name? My name’s Gina.Hello!Hello!What’s his name? His name’s Peter.Hello!Hello!What’s her name? Her name’s Anna.2.Listen to the conversations and finish the exercises.Teacher: Yesterday I made a new friend.Her name is Jenny.She is very lovely.She introduces many friends of hers to me.Do you want to know about them? Let’s listen to the tape and find out some useful information.(Students listen to the tape and give the right answers.)
3.Act out the dialogues.(在特定的情景下表演对话更符合实际,更贴近生活。)
Teacher: Now you’ve known something about introductions and greetings.But if you are in other places, how do you introduce yourself and greet others? Look at the four pictures and imagine you are in such a situation, how do you get to know new friends?
(Students can choose any picture they like and act out the dialogues.)
Example:
(At a party)
Sa: Hello!I’m Lucy Green.What’s your name?
Sb: My name is Kate Brown, Jim’s classmate.Nice to meet you.Sa: Nice to meet you, too.I’m Jim’s sister.Welcome to Jim’s birthday party.Make yourself at home.Sb: Thanks, I will.Step Two: Choose English names.1.Play a name game.(有效引出“英文名字”这一主题。)
Teacher:As we know, everyone has a name.Each name has its special meaning and so do English names.Do you want to have an English name? If you do, let’s play a name game.The winners of the game will get English names.Rules: Every student should introduce himself or herself,but at the same time he(she)should repeat all the above-mentioned classmates' names.Example:
S1: My name’s Tony.S2: His name’s Tony.My name’s Linda.S3: His name’s Tony.Her name’s Linda.My name’s Nick.S4: His name’s Tony.Her name’s Linda.His name's Nick.My name's Kim.S5:…….2.Choose English names.1).Find out first names and last names.(用小组的方式完成名字的识别。)
Teacher: Congratulations to the winners.Now you choose English names from the box.But before you choose names, you must know English names have two parts: first name and last name.Look at the box, can you classify them according to the demands?
Period Three
课前准备
教师:准备所需的歌曲磁带、名片样本及各项表格。
学生:制作名片所需的纸张、画笔等。
教学设计
Step One: Present the English numbers.1.Sing the song “Ten Little Indian Boys”.(歌曲欢快有趣,比起单纯教授单词更为有效。)
Teacher: During the first two classes, we’ve known something about new friends names.But if we want to contact them.What shall we do?
S1: A telephone call.T: But you don’t have their telephone numbers.S1: Ask for their telephone numbers.T: If we want to know about their telephone numbers, we must learn how to say these numbers in English.Let’s learn to sing “Ten Little Indian Boys”.Words
One little, two little, three little Indisns,Four little, five little, six little Indians,Seven little, eight little, nine little Indians,Ten little Indian boys.(After singing the song, tell the students not to forget “zero”.)
T: Count the number together from zero to nine.S2: Zero…
2.Listen to the conversation and write the telephone number.(通过听力复习单词。)
Teacher: This is my friend’s telephone number.But I can’t hear it uld you please help me write it down?
(Students listen to the recording of 1b in Section B and give the answer.)
Step Two: Drills.1.Make a survey about your partners’ telephone numbers.(调查组内成员的电话号码,重点练习所学句式。)
Teacher: Thank you for your help.But do you want to know your friends’ telephone numbers? Now let’s make a survey about it and try to fill in the chart.
S1: Hello, Liu Yu.What’s your telephone number?
S2: My telephone number is …
S1: Oh, thank you.What about yours, Lin Fang?
S3: It’s…
S1: … And may I know your phone number, Yin Kailin?
S4: …
S1: Thank you very much.Oh, I nearly forgot.My telephone number is…
2.Report it to the class.(After the survey, every group can choose a student to report the survey result to the class.)
Example:
My telephone number is… Liu Yu’s phone number is… Lin Fang’s telephone number is… Yin Kailin’ s phone number is…
3.Listen and match the names and telephone numbers.(制作电话号码簿这一任务能够大面积调动学生装的参与意识。)
Teacher: I will play the recording twice.The first time just listen.The second time, write the letter of the person’s telephone number in the space after that person’s name.(Students listen to the tape.)
T: Next, I’ll play the recording again.This time, fill in the missing numbers.(Students listen to the tape again.)
T: Can you find out whose telephone numbers they are ?
S:…
4.Make an address book.Teacher: The new term begins.Our class needs an address book to contact each other.Now we can put all the information together and then we can have our own address book.Pay attention to the address book headings “Names” and “Phone numbers”.Now work in groups of six and ask your group members “What’s his /her name? And What’s his/her phone number?”
Step Three: Make an ID card. some different ID cards to the class and try to enjoy them.(向学生展示不同种类的名片,一方面开阔学生眼界,一方面便于学生找出名片所含内容。)(引导学生有效搜集名片上的信息,提高学生的阅读能力。)
Teacher: Now our class has a very useful address book.We can use it to talk with others on the phone.But for most adults, ID cards are more important because they are easy to take along.What’s more, they are very enjoyable.Sometimes they can show the owners’ special personalities.Look at the ID cards below and try to enjoy them.Teacher: From the cards above, what can you find out ?
S1: It must have a person’s name…
S2: Sometimes it has a motto.T: Yes, It must have a person’s name, postcode, telephone number, home address and e-mail address.So if you have a chance to make an ID card, you must think about all the above.But before you make your card, first let’s learn how to get information from the card.It’s very important.2.Read the ID card and answer the questions.(提供参考信息,但允许学生创新。)
Teacher: Look!Here’s an ID card of my friend’s.Please look at it and find out some useful information about her.1.What’s her telephone number?
2.What’s her family name?
3.What’s her first name?
Homework
1.Students are asked to make ID Cards of their own.Demands: A.Useful information must be included.B.It can be designed as beautifully as possible.C.Students may show their own personalities if possible.2.Find out the information about the famous person.Period Four
课前准备
教师:准备评价表、名人图片和一张个人海报。
学生:准备好完成的名片参加展览。
教学设计
Step One: Make an ID card show. the ID cards to the students.Teacher: Yesterday all of you made some beautiful ID we’ll make a show here.Let’s enjoy it together and try to choose the best ones.2.Find the owner of the card.Teacher: The ID card show is over.All the cards are mixed together.I can’t find the owners.Who can help me?
S1:I can.(Show one of the cards to another students.)
S1:Excuse me, are you in...?
S2:Yes, I am.S1:What’s your telephone number?
S2:It’s...S1:Are you...?
S2:Yes, I am.S1:Here’s your ID card.S2:Thank you.(Teacher asks more students to find the owners of ID cards).Step Two: “Face to Face”.1.Play a guessing game.Teacher: ID cards are useful.But some persons’names are known to all the people.They are very famous.Now look at the pictures and guess their names.(The teacher shows some famous person’s pictures and students guess their names and give their answers.)
llect useful information.Teacher: These persons are very famous.But it’s better for us to know something else about them.Before class you’ve been asked to collect some information.Now let’s exchange it together.3.Report it to class.Each group can choose a student to give a report about their favourite person.The other students can ask him some questions in class.Example:
S1:This is Michael Jordan.He’s years old.He’s...He speaks...His birth place is...He is a famous...player.He’s a member of six Chicago Bulls championship teams.People like to call him “Air Jordan”.S2:Do you like Michael Jordan? Why or Why not?
S1:Yes, I like him very much because he’s so...S2:Do you want to be a basketball player like him?
S1:Of course I do.That’s my dream.Step Three: Make a poster about yourself.Teacher: Do you want to be famous all over the world?
First you must learn to show yourself.Now you have a chance to do that.Please try to make a poster about yourself.In your poster you should try to introduce yourself.(Students can write a passage about themselves.They can give some personal information.They can alse design the poster as well as they can.)
Homework
Students are asked to sun up this unit, especially about how to talk with others politely.
七年级英语上册课件(篇11)
一、教学目标
1、知识目标
(1)学习并掌握描述天气的词汇:rainy、windy、sunny、cloudy、snowy
(2)掌握句型结构:
—How is the weather(in +地点)?/What’s the weather like?(in +地点)?
—It’s rainy/windy/sunny/cloudy/snowy.2、能力目标
学会使用本单元的单词和句型询问天气并作出恰当的应答。
3、情感目标
(1)通过小组合作完成任务,培养学生团结合作的意识。
(2)通过谈论天气,了解一些地理常识。
(3)通过学习天气,培养学生的乐观积极向上的心态。
二、教学重难点
1、教学重点
(1)描述天气的词汇:rainy、windy、sunny、cloudy、snowy
(2)掌握句型结构:
—How is the weather(in +地点)? /What’s the weather like?(in +地点)?
—It’s rainy/windy/sunny/cloudy/snowy.2、教学难点
(1)名词转换形容词的构词法:sun—sunny、rain—rainy、wind—windy、cloud—cloudy、snow—snowy
(2)国外城市的读音和拼音
三、教学方法
教师采用任务型教学方法让学生主动参与小组合作探究,迅速有效地开展各项活动。
四、教学辅助工具:黑板、多媒体设备
五、教学过程:
1、热身运动
(1)师生共唱“rain? go? away”, 活跃课堂气氛。
(2)做个模拟下雨的游戏,引出本课有关天气的话题。
2、导入生词:
(1)以weather为中心词,让学生进行头脑风暴,回忆有关天气的词汇,然后观看PPT图片导入本课新单词:rainy、windy、sunny、cloudy、snowy
(2)教师带读,让学生熟记单词。
3、呈现句型
(1)给出句型结构:
—How is the weather(in +地点)? /What’s the weather like?(in +地点)?
—It’s rainy/windy/sunny/cloudy/snowy.(2)分别用两个句型进行游戏比赛,让学生在游戏中反复巩固新句型和新知识点。
4、听力练习,课本37页,1b5、PPT呈现中国气象地图,让学生小组讨论并抽代表上讲台模拟天气预报,并作出评价。
6、课堂总结:总结本节课所学单词和句型
7、课堂练习
8、情感升华
六、教学反思
1、课堂板书设计得应该更能适合本节课的总结这一环节,以后注意板书的书写
2、课堂口语需加强,有些突发状况还不能立即用英语表达。
四年级英语上册课件
教师需要非常认真地制作自己的教案和课件,因为这是高效教学的必要条件。那么,我们应该从哪个角度去编写教案和课件呢?经过栏目小编的仔细挑选,发现“四年级英语上册课件”这篇文章非常出色。希望这些资料能够对您有所帮助,祝您成功!
四年级英语上册课件 篇1
教材分析:
本模块的主题是Food. 主要语言功能是要求学生通过学习谈论有关食物的`话题。它承接第二册已经学习过三餐的基础上,继续展开话题,谈论Do you want……? 主要学习Do you want some rice? Yes, please. No, thank you. Have you got chopsticks in English? 等几个句子。从食物谈到中西方食文化的一些差异。题材非常生活化,是学生感兴趣的话题之一,使学生能学以致用。本课在这一册中是第一单元,地位至关重要,承上启下,不仅要对上学期的知识进行复习,还要使学生对新学期的学习充满兴趣。
学情分析:
学生对吃的方面都十分敢兴趣,所以本节课比较吸引学生,引起学生兴趣。对于学生来说学习英语的时间很少,所以关于单词的记忆需要采取在课堂上多做些复习,保证学生至少有些记忆。目前主要要求学生会读会所以听读方面操练比较多,而写方面少些,导致学生听会说中文,但看的时候就有些记不起来,所以这方面需要加强。
教学目标:
⒈能听说读写单词:Chinese、fast food、chopsticks、difficult 、want、make,some
⒉能使用句子:Do you want some...?且能做出正确回答Yes,please.No,thank you.
教学重点:
掌握句型Do you want some...?Yes,please.No,thank you.并能就食物的选择向他人提问或回答他人。
教学难点:
chopsticks、difficult的发音及新句型的运用。
教学准备:
单词卡片,录音磁带,录音机。
教学过程:
1、导入:通过出示一些以前学过的事物方面的图片,引导学生说出其的英文,让学生即能复习知识又能被诱人的美食图片所吸引,提高学习兴趣。
2、引出今天课文的新单词,带领学生读新单词。
3、板书今天要学习的句型 Do you want some rice? Yes please. No,thank you.然后把准备好的食物卡片贴在黑板上,分组进行用出示的事物卡片代替rice说一说。
4、学习课文,听录音让学生跟读,然后在有老师领读,带领学生了解课文内容。
5、小游戏,把事物卡片拿下来分发给每个小组的第一个学生,然后以击鼓传花的方式把食物卡片在小组中传递,当鼓声停时卡片在谁手上就用Do you want some …?提问小组队员,被提问的用Yes please. No,thank you.来做选择回答。
(让学生学习兴趣达到高潮,通过游戏掌握今天的重点句子。并进行小组比赛,让学生评出哪个组表现最好,说得最流利,小组成员配合最积极大声。)
7、布置作业。
四年级英语上册课件 篇2
博乐市第三小学课堂教学设计
单 元:Unit6 课 题 :Meet My Family 课 时: 四课时 教学内容:Period1 A Let’s learn Let’s play 教学目标 知识与技能:
1.知识目标: 能够听、说、认读单词:family、parents、uncle、aunt、baby brother,并能用“This is my„.He/She has„.He/She likes„.He/She is„.”等英语正确、流利地介绍自己的家庭成员。
2.技能目标:能够用英语简单介绍自己的家庭成员。过程与方法:
Use tasked-based teaching methods and situation teaching method, with some games and chants to interest the class.情感态度价值观:
培养学生热爱家庭,关心父母的情感。教学重点:
使学生掌握单词:family, parents, uncle, aunt, baby brother并能在情景中运用。教学难点:
能用英语正确、流利地介绍自己的家庭。教学准备: Some pictures 教学过程: Step1 Greetings
2、教师出示单词卡片,孩子抢答。教师在黑板上画出family tree,3、教师出示课件(自己的家庭照片),用This is my„.She/He is.„进行介绍和描述。
4、孩子把自己的照片放在投影上,尝试用This is my„.She/He is.„进行介绍和描述。Step2 Presentation
1、教师出示课件说:“Do you know this is my family? 教师把family这个单词贴在黑板上family tree的顶端。教师:I have a big family.How many people in my family?。再问:How many people
in your family.鼓励孩子回答。This is my mother.This is my father.They are my parents.教师带读,学生练词。教师把parents贴在family tree上相应的位置。教师指自己的家庭成员说:“This is my uncle.This is my aunt。”并把两个单词贴在family tree上,说:“My uncle is my father’s or mother’s brother.My aunt is my father’s or my mother’s sister.”
2、播放配套课件:教师说:“This is Amy’s family.How many people in Amy’s family.Who are they? ”指课件中的单词认读。
3、教师分别出示Amy的家庭成员的照片,让孩子说说单词。
4、进行Group work的练习,先让一个孩子拿着自己的家庭照片放在投影上,介绍和描述家庭成员。Step3 Practice
1、Listen to a song Come and see my family2、听一听,画一画
学生相互描述自己的家庭成员,同组同学根据描述画出来。看看描述的是否准确 Step4 Production. work 2.Good to know.教师介绍C部分Good to know的内容,学生跟说mom, mommy, dad, daddy, papa.教师让学生了解这些都是口语。
边看视频边学唱《Come and see my family 》 Step5.Homework 学生做配套练习。
板书设计: Unit6 Meet My Family This is my„.教学反思:
博乐市第三小学课堂教学设计
单 元:Unit6 课 题 :Meet My Family 课 时: 四课时 教学内容:Period2 A Let’s talk Let’s count 教学目标 知识与技能:
1.能听懂、会说本课对话,并能在情景中进行运用。
2.能听、说、认读本课句型How many people are there in your family ?并能进行替换练习。
3.了解英语国家的一些称谓方式。过程与方法:
Use tasked-based teaching methods and situation teaching method.情感态度价值观:
Pupil is interesting at English, they like to do action., and they feel happy for communicating.教学重点:
熟练掌握句型How many „„are there?的用法并能在实践中运用。教学难点:
理解Let’s talk中句子的含义,并能进行初步的运用 教学准备:Some pictures 教学过程:
Step1 Greetings and revision Sing the song(上节课扩展练习的中的歌曲)单词抢答: 教师出示单词卡片,学生快速抢答
教师少拿一张卡片,让孩子猜猜。“How many cards in my hand?” Step2 Presentation 教师出示上一课Let’s learn部分的课件。说:“This is Amy’s family.How many people are there in my family? Who are they?”
教师分别请几名学生拿着自己的家庭照片提问:How many people are there in my family? Who are they?”大家试着猜一猜,用句子:”There are „people in the picture.They are my„.”来回答。
教师让学生猜一猜自己的照片:(把照片在孩子面前晃一下)问:How many people are there in my family?。学生说:“There are 6 people in your family.”教师说:“My family 教师提问一些学生How many people are there in the picture?将答案写在黑板上,再请孩子用My family has „ members.的句型说一说。
教师指着人数较少的家庭说:“That’s only 3”
教师和学生一起总结:问:“How many apples are there on the tree?”引导学生回答。Step3 Practice
1、Who are they? 教师快速出示Amy 的家庭成员照片,让孩子猜猜Who are they?
2、猜一猜 Step4 Production 1.Let’s count.教师先做好示范和要求,然后让学生两人一组练习。2.Make a survey.How many people are there in your family? Who are they? Step4.Homework 学生做配套练习。
板书设计: Unit6 Meet My Family How many people are there in your family?
Who are they?
My family has „members 教学反思:
博乐市第三小学课堂教学设计
单 元:Unit6 课 题 :Meet My Family 课 时: 四课时 教学内容:Period3 B Let's learn Let’s play 教学目标 知识与技能:
单词nurse, doctor, farmer, driver的拼写。过程与方法:
Use tasked-based teaching methods and situation teaching method, with some games and chants to interest the class.情感态度价值观:
培养学生热爱学习,热爱劳动的高尚品质。教学重点:
熟练掌握四个单词的拼写。单词nurse, doctor, farmer, driver的拼写。教学难点:
单词的正确拼、读、写。I’m going to be a„ 教学准备:Some cards 教学过程: Step1 Warm up
口语练习:How many people are there in your family? Who are they? What are they? 让学生改编B部分的chant, 然后表演出来。
Listen and act 看一看,传一传
各组的第一个孩子看卡片,向后耳语传单词,最后一个学生说出来,看看那个小组传得最快最准。Step2 Presentation
教师出示Read and write部分的课件,问“What can you see?”学生根据情况说出家庭成员的单词。
教师出示词卡,孩子抢答单词,指导每个词读音时提醒学生注意每个单词的最后尾音(mother father sister brother)
教师板书四会单词,学生边拼读,便跟着老师书空练习。每个单词,分别请每组一名同学拼拼,比一比谁拼读的熟练,快速。
教师遮盖单词,孩子试拼每一词。在小组里进行拼读练习,学生互为小老师,互相帮助
教师出示卡片,让孩子拼出相应的单词,哪组拼出的多奖励一个苹果标志,拼出的单词最多的组获胜。
教师贴出图片,问:“Can you spell these words?”学生回答并拼出单词。教师把家庭成员的单词写在黑板上的四线三格中。
出示单词,教师在四线格中示范书写单词,学生在本上模仿拼写。
教师出示Write and say部分的内容,让学生看图独立完成短文。
通过Read and write部分的动画来学习本部分的内容。
学生小组为单位,模仿Write and say部分表演,拿出自己的家庭照片,介绍自己的家庭。Step3 Practice
1.拼读单词列队比赛
将全班分成两组,教师发给每个学生一张字母卡片,不常用的字母(如Q,Z)可以一人多拿几张,游戏开始,2.字母组词。Step4 Production
做Let’s check练习:教师播放录音,让学生 Step5: Homework.做配套练习。
板书设计: Unit6 Meet My Family How many people are there in your family? Who are they? What are they? 教学反思:
博乐市第三小学课堂教学设计
单 元:Unit6 课 题 :Meet My Family 课 时: 四课时 教学内容:Period4 B Let's talk read and write 教学目标 知识与技能:
(1)能听、说、读新授单词,baseball player, driver, farmer, doctor, nurse.(2)能综合运用句型:What's your...?She/ He is a...She/He is...She/He likes...(3)能说Let’s do 部分内容,并且能够做出相应的动作。过程与方法:
Use tasked-based teaching methods and situation teaching method, with some games and chants to interest the class.情感态度价值观:
为了自己的梦想而努力学习,尽力实现梦想。教学重点:
掌握5个单词的读音,特别是baseball player和 driver。教学难点:
掌握句型:What's your...?She/ He is a...She/He is...教学准备:school things 教学过程: Step 1: Warm-up(1)Sing the song with the actions: finger family [设计意图]通过学生喜欢和本课时有关的简单易唱的歌曲,活跃课堂气氛,学生开心地进入今天的课堂。
(2)after the song, change some some words: Change daddy finger to father finger.Change mommy finger to motherr finger.Change brother finger to uncle finger.Change sister finger to aunt finger.Change baby finger to brother finger.[设计意图]改歌词是为了本课时要出现的人物做铺垫。(3)出示本课时课题:Meet my family Step 2: Lead-in(1)T: Look at the board.There is a family tree.Whose family tree is it? 拿出 Chen Jie的头像贴到Family tree 的右下角。This is Chen Jie's family tree.引导学生说出:This is Chen Jie's mother ,father, aunt ,uncle and brother [设计意图]通过黑板上的写有Chen Jie家庭成员的单词来导出今天要学的新单词
Step 3: Presentation and practice(1)ppt show mother's picture and ask: What's her mother? 并在ppt上标注了中文(她妈妈是干什么的)以便学生更好得理解这句话的意思。She's a nurse.(从学生知道的单词入手)
① Practice this sentence groups by groups(注意学生的发音)② T: Look at her, is she tall? Ss: No, She isn't.She's short.T: Look at her face 引导学生说出 She's beautiful.③ ppt 中出现一个画板,引导学生说出:She likes painting.如果学生回答art也可以。
④ Practice the sentences together: What's her mother? She's a nurse.She's short and beautiful.She likes painting.(因为nurse这个单词以前出现过所以在教授新知时不是一个单词出现,而是以句子为单位呈现的。)③
(2)Chen Jie's mother is a nurse.What's her father? Here is a riddle for you.He helps sick people.He works in a hospital.(在hospital 的后面加上了医院的标志以便学生更容易猜出)① Teach: He's a doctor.② Practice the sentence two lines by two lines ③ T: Look at him, is he short? Ss:No,he isn't.He's tall and thin.④ ppt 中出现一幅有关实验的图片,引导学生说出 He likes science.⑤ Practice the sentences together: What's her father? He's a doctor.He's tall and thin.He likes science.(3)Let's chant Make a new chant(换成妈妈的头像)Father,father, _____ , _______, He's your father.___'s your ______? What's your father? What's your _____? My father is a doctor.My _____ is a ______.[设计意图]本课时的重点句型是What's your father? 设计这个chant是为了将之前的What's her father?转换成What's your father?(4)Show them the rules drive---driver teach---teacher write---writer sing---singer dance---dancer clean---cleaner read---reader work---worker play---player(7)Show them the picture of a football Show them the picture of a footbal them the picture of a baseball Can you play baseball? No Chen Jie's brother can teach us.He's a baseball player.Teach the new word: baseball player He's ______.He likes ________.(8)Look back to the board(让学生看着黑板上的图片回忆刚才学过的有关职业的单词)(9)Game : I say you do(10)Let's do(11)将已经准备好的有关本课时的重点句型让学生念了之后贴到黑板上,并进行对话操练。
What's your father? My father is a doctor.He's tall.He likes sports.Step 4: Consolidation(1)Pair work(学生根据自己的实际情况问答)A: What's your __________ ?
B: My __________ is a _________.He/ She is _________..He/ She likes ___________.(2)My dream(老师的梦想)T: When I was a child.I have a dream.My dream is to be a teacher in the future.What are you going to be in the future? I am going to be a/an _____.Write down your dream.Say out your dream, and put it into the wish bottle.(3)情感教育:Please study hard and you can realize your dream.希望同学们能够努力学习实现自己的梦想。Step5Homework 做本课时配套练习。
板书设计: Unit6 Meet My Family A: What's your __________ ?
B: My __________ is a _________.He/ She is _________..He/ She likes ___________.课后反思:
四年级英语上册课件 篇3
1.通过唱Days of the week 这首歌,让学生进一步掌握一周7天的表示法。
2.通过口、笔试练习,要求学生掌握现在进行时各人称和系动词的搭配。
3.让学生看图说对话并进行情景表演。
1.学生学会本课的歌曲,人人知道意思并能进行表演。
2.通过口、笔头练习,要求学生进一步掌握现在进行时各人称的不同表示法,以及它们与系动词的搭配。灵活使用He/She is doing something. We/They/You/The boys are doing something.
老师带录音机和自制的周历、图片。学生拿《活动手册》、打球、做游戏、跳绳、玩悠悠球的图片。
T:Is it time to go home?
S:No, it’s time to play games.
T:Oh, we play games on Wednesday.
Let’s go and play. Look!
What is he doing?
S:He is playing football.
1.先用自制的周历提问What day is it today复习一周七天。
2.让学生听录音欣赏一遍歌曲。
3.老师讲解这首歌的意思。
Sunday la la la,
Monday la la la,
Tuesday la la la , Wednesday,
Ia Thursday la la la ,
Friday la la la , Saturday.
星期天,啦啦啦,星期一,啦啦啦,
星期二,啦啦啦,星期三,啦,
星期四,啦啦啦,星期五,啦啦啦,
星期六。这就构成了一星期。
4.老师带领大家读这几个词,然后反复放录音教学生学唱这首歌。
5.老师和同学们一起唱,并分组进行比赛。
老师拿起几张图片和学生进行问答练习。老师说问句:
What is he/she/David doing?
He/She is playing…
What are they/you doing?
They/We are playing…
1.完成《活动手册》上没有做完的练习。
2.预习下一课。
3.准备一些可以做礼物的材料。
四年级英语上册课件 篇4
Unit Five What would you like?
教材分析:本单元围绕“食品、饮料和餐具”展开教学,教学内容与日常生活密切相关,不难激起学生们的学习兴趣,milk, bread, ,water, egg等单词在三年级时听说读都已接触,老师重点让学生在“写”上下功夫,句型在回顾Can I have some ……,please ?的基础上,学习what would you like?句型,用来询问他人的需求,本单元八个四会单词,教师要严格要求,规范指导,为今后写的教学作个铺垫。
一、单元教学目标: 1.能力目标:
⑴能够询问一日三餐的食物及饮料。
⑵会使用用餐时的基本用语,如:What would you like for ……?Help yourself等。⑶能够听懂并发出传递与使用餐具的一些指令,如:Pass me a plate, please.Use the chopsticks.2.知识目标:
⑴掌握A、B两部分Read and write中,bread, egg, milk, water, rice, beef, fish, chicken 的拼写。
⑵认读A、B两部分Let’s learn, Let’s talk 中的单词和句子。(3)理解Let’s do, Let’s chant等部分的内容。⑷了解story time, Good to know等部分的内容。3.情感、策略、文化等有关目标
⑴情感、态度:激发学生学习英语的兴趣,培养学生学习英语的积极态度,使学
生乐于合作参与,勇于进行交际实践。⑵学习策略:注重合作学习。
⑶文化目标:了解中西方饮食文化方面的一些知识。
二、教学重、难点分析:
1.本单元教学重点是A、B两部分的食物、餐具名称以及就餐用语,其中难点是用餐时的基本会话,教师在教学词汇时,应结合过去所学的食物,饮料单词及句型,运用灵活多样的教学方法帮助学生理解、巩固、同时,在教学A、B部分Let’s learn 的词汇时,可适当铺垫渗透Let’s talk 中的句子,如:What would you like for ……?I can use …等,从而降低了对话教学的难度,然后通过朗读,操练,表演等方式使学生比较顺利地掌握用餐会话。
2.本单元主要学习与一日三餐相关的词汇与会话,引入 新课时,适当复习句型Can I have a/some…?Do you like…?等,同时利用新的句型,如:What would you like for …?等滚动复习所学知识,新旧联系。交替复现。
三、课时分配:
第一课时:A Let’s learn Let’s play C.Let’s draw 第二课时:A Let’s talk Make a survey.第三课时:A Read and write C story time 第四课时:B Let’s learn Let’s do C Good to know.第五课时:B Let’s talk Let’s chant.第六课时:B Read and write C Let’s check.第一课时
教学内容:A.Let’s learn Let’s play C.Let’s draw 教学目标:
1、知识目标:认读本课中的单词和句子:rice ,noodles, fish, beef, soup ,vegetable, What would you like for dinner? I′d like some…
2、能力目标:能够听、说、认读单词rice, noodles.fish.beef.soup.vegetable.初步掌握What would you like for dinner ? I’d like some ….3.情感、策略、文化等有关目标
(1)情感态度:激发学生学习英语的兴趣,培养学生学习英语的积极态度,使学生乐于合作参与,勇于进行实践。(2).学习策略:注重合作学习。
教学重点:能听说,认读rice, noodles, fish, beef, soup, vegetable.教学难点:能够正确读单词vegetable.教学准备:
1、教师准备食物、饮料的图片和一顶纸帽。
2、学生准备本课六个生词词卡。教学过程: Step1 Preparation 1.Enjoy the song “An apple a day”,师播放歌曲,让学生在快乐的学习氛围中投入到本节课学习。2.Free talk.:①T:(出示苹果图片)Do you like apples? ②T:(把图片给学生)I like apples, Can I have some apples? Ss: Sure.Here you are.③老师出示不同的图片,让学生问,学生答(生生互动,师生互动)可采用集体和个别结合的方式。
④用以上方法,复习juice, bread, milk, chicken, hot dog, hamburger等单词和句型。Step 2 Presentation
1、单词导呈 ⑴教学单词 rice T出示图片,板书教读rice,注意升降调教学。指出“I”发字母读音「ai」“e” 不发音,渗透音标教学。
齐读说:rice rice I like rice(集体→个别)T: What do you like ? Ss: I like rice.What would you like for dinner? 帮助学生回答:I’d like rice.⑵同样方法教学soup, fish, beef.⑶教学Noodles(教师做饥饿状)T:You’re full ,But I’m hungry, because I had very little at breakfast.Guess , what did I have? T:(动作演示)They’re long,S:Noodles, T: 板书:hungry ,noodles,教读 B :Let’s sing and act.唱歌曲:Noodle Noodle Dumpling.配以动作。⑷ 教学 Vegetable, T:I like noodles very much..Guess ,What else do I like? Ss: Fish/…?
T:No ,I like vegetables.T(拿出各种蔬菜实物图片)Look: I have many kinds of vegetables, Carrot is a kind of vegetables, Tomato is a kind of vegetable.T把图片发给学生,T:I like vegetables, Can I have some vegetables? S1:Sure, Here you are.S1→S2→S3……
2、听读正音。
放录音,生指单词跟读。
2、合作学习。
(1)全班齐读,小组齐读、个别读。
(2)小组内兵教兵,此时,教师辅导检查后进生。Step3 Practice(1)听音,找图片。(2)看口型猜单词。Step4 Production.Let’s play.(1)教师扮演一名顾客,请一名同学上台戴好纸帽扮演营业员,师生之间练习对话:Can I have some…please? Sure ,Here you are ,2/… yuan。付钱时可象征性
地拍一下对方的手。(2)同桌表演(3)个别展示。Step5 Progressr.一、Draw your own menu.二、Homework:用 “what do you like?”调查小组内同学的喜好食物,不少于3人。
第二课时
教学内容:A Let’s talk Make a survey
教学目标:
1.能力知识目标:1能听懂会说:What’s for dinner? Wait and see , What would you like for dinner? I’d like some …,please ,Everything’s ready.2.能运用句型:What would you like for dinner? I’d like some …“进行相互调查。2.情感、策略、文化目标:培养学生学习英语的积极态度,勇于进行交际实践的能力,同伴间合作的能力。
教学重点:能听懂、会说Let’s talk中的话。
教学难点:能听懂、会说:What would you like for dinner? I’d like some…, please, Everything’s ready.教学准备:
1、教师准备rice soup, fish, vegetable的图片。录音机、大磁带。
2、Ss 准备食物、饮料词卡。教学过程: Step1 Preparation 1.Sing the song“ What would you like?” 2.Revision ①T:出示rice, soup, beef, fish, noodles, vegetables图片,让学生说出英语名称(集体→个别)。
(2)T出示以上实物的词卡,齐读、个别读的形式交替进行。
⒊Free talk 借助刚才的图片和词卡互问互答:Can I have some……,please.Sure.Here you are.Step2.Presentation
教学What’s for dinner? Game:猜晚餐吃什么? T:(出示各张食物图片的背面)What’s for dinner? Guess!Ss:beef/…rice/…?
T:Beef/…is ready,(把图片逐张贴在黑板上)教学Everything’s ready
T:(教师贴完图片后小结)Everything’s ready.让学生理解意思,操练由集体到个别,并板书领读。
教学What would you like? I’d like some…,please。
(1)紧接着上个环节问学生:What would you like?引导学生回答I’d like some…领读操练问句和答句并板书。(2).Ask and answer in pairs.4.教学wait and see.师点拔,让学生理解。5.Chant: What’s for dinner? What’s for dinner? What would you like for dinner ? Rice and soup , rice and soup.I’d like some rice and soup.Step3 Practice 1.听音答题
Q1:What would Mike like? Ss: listen and answer.Check the answer.2.听音正音
师说:Open your books,turn to Page 59,listen,point and read aloudly.3.合作共建: ⑴全班齐读
⑵小组齐读,其他组注意听。
⑶个别学生读,其他学生听,并纠正。
⑷小组合作分角色读,师巡视全班,随时指导各个小组活动。4.表演展示:
让学生分角色表演对话,检查两组。Step duction 见课本P59 Group work Mike: What would you like for dinner ? Chen Jie: I’d like some… … 让学生询问组内成员完成调查表。Step 5 Progress 1.小结:老师或学生总结本课主要内容,让学生齐读,使本课内容前后融合。Homework:熟读对话,可以尝试翻译背诵对话。
第三课时
教学内容:A Read and write C: Story time 教学目标:
1、能力知识目标(1)四会掌握bread, egg, milk, water.(2)能听懂:What would like for breakfast?
2、情感、策略、文化目标:培养学生学习英语的积极态度,勇于进行交际实践的能力,同伴间合作的能力。
教学重点:bread, egg, milk, water 的拼读。教学难点:bread, egg, milk, water 的拼读
教学准备:老师准备食物、饮料词卡和一个大石英钟以及猫和松鼠的头饰。学生准备食物、饮料词卡。教学过程: Step 1 Preparation 1.Sing a song “What Would You Like ?”
2.Free talk 师生问答: What would you like for dinner? I’d like… …然后同桌开火车操练,连锁问答。
3.学生听Let’s learn ,Let’s talk部分的录音,跟读,齐读。Step 2 Presentation 1.出示一个石英钟,告诉学生It’s 7:00.I’m hungry.It’s time for breakfast, 让学生理解此句意思,师板书领读breakfast.接着问:What would you like for breakfast?
多让几个学生回答。2.做“猜一猜“游戏
让学生问: What would you like for breakfast? 师回答:I’d like some… 师注意说到食物、饮料单词时只做相应口型,不发出声音,让学生猜是什么单词,师板书在四线格内,师口型示范的单词分别是 bread, milk, water, egg., 教学生拼读并书空,注意总结字母或字母组合的发音规律。Step 3 Practice 1.Read and say.(1)Ask and answer in pairs.For eg: What would you like? I’d like some bread.B—r—e—a—d.bread.(2)Write down the words: copy three times.看谁写的又快又对。(3)组内比赛记单词。2.Write and say(1)让学生自己填写,师解释 a glass of… What a big breakfast!的汉语意思。然后师出示答案,同桌交换检查(2)齐读
(3)合上课本,学生手拿词卡,比赛谁说的短文熟练。Step 4 Production
1、Make a survey:小组内一人扮记者,调查组内同学。用What would you like for breakfast?问,I’d like…作答。.Story time:(可当本课读的拓展),师准备道具让学生表演更能激起学生的兴趣。
Step 5 Progress 1.小结:让学生总结本课学习主要内容,齐读。或让个别同学说,其他同学补充。2..Read and write P 35 见配套练习
(1)A: Can I have some , please?(牛奶图)B: Sure.Here you are.(2)A: What would you like ? B: I’d like an.(鸡蛋图)。(3)A;What would you like for breakfast? B: Some(面包图)。(4)A: Have some ,please.(一杯水图)3..Homework: 做出本课的四张四会单词的卡片,放到家中的实物旁。背诵这四个单词的拼写。四上U5B1(词汇课)
教学内容:B.Let’s learn Let’s do C.Good to know 我的设计 教学目标: 知识目标
1.能够听说认读单词 plate, fork, knife , spoon, chopsticks.2.听懂指示语,并按照指令做出相应动作、能力目标:能听说认读本课词汇,并在实际生活中运用。
情感、策略、文化目标:培养学英语用英语的兴趣培养学生学习英语的积极态度,勇于进行交际实践的能力,同伴间合作的能力。了解中西方餐饮文化方面的知识。教学重点:能够听说认读plate, fork, knife , spoon, chopsticks.教学难点:chopsticks.的发音。
教学准备:1.师准备盘子,叉子,刀,汤匙,筷子等实物。2.学生准备餐具生词词卡.教学过程: Step 1 Preparation 1.Sing a song“What would you like?” 2.师出示词卡复习:bread, egg, milk, water.3.齐读P60 Write and say Step 2 Preparation ⒈单词导呈 ⑴教学plate 师出示实物plate,板书并教读。指出a发字母读音,e在词尾不发音并渗透音标教学,进行升降调教学。师把盘子递给一个学生,说pass you a plate,再让学生传给自己,说 Pass me a plate.让全班同学齐说!师再把盘子递给一个学生教会学生说:Can I help you? 师可释意。并回答Yes, pass me a plate, please!然后把学生分成两大组,对话操练。⑵教学knife 师出示实物,板书并教读knife,指出“i”发「ai」,词尾e不发音,升降调教学,动作演示并说:Cut with the knife ,然后师生齐做动作齐说指令,渗透Let’s do 教学。⑶教学spoon, fork,用教学knife 的方法教学 spoon, fork 并渗透Let’s do 教学。⑷教学chopsticks 出示实物,板书chopsticks分音节教学,指出筷子常用复数形式,渗透use the chopsticks.2..听读正音 3.合作共建,Step3 Practice 1.看口型猜单词
2.找朋友:两组同学,一组拿图片,一组拿词卡,看谁找的又对又快。3.Let’s do
⑴听录音,观察图片。⑵听录音,做动作。⑶听录音,边说边做。⑷小组内操练。Step4 Production 猜一猜,以下朋友会用什么餐具?
师出示:Sarah, Amy, Mike, ChenJie , ZhangReny的图片(或让学生看课本前面的人物图),Good to know:师简要介绍有关西餐甜点的小知识。Step5 Progress、1、小结:总结本课主要内容。
2、Homework:用我们学过的餐具组成一幅图,并说一说,相信你一定做得很棒!
第四课时
教学内容:B Let’s talk Let’s chant 教学目标: 能力知识目标:
1、能听懂、会说I can use chopsticks.Let’s me try ,Help yourself.Let me show you.Mm……Yummy.I like Chinese food,.we had a good time.See you tomorrow.Good night.2、听懂指示语,并按照指令做出相应动作,情感、策略、文化目标:培养学生学习英语的积极态度,勇于进行交际实践的能力,同伴间合作的能力。了解中西方餐饮文化方面的差异。教学重点:能听懂、会说 Let’s talk 中对话。
教学难点:能听懂、会说:I can use chopsticks, Help yourself.课前准备:1.师准备 盘子、叉子、刀、汤匙、筷子等实物。2.师准备录音机,磁带、教学挂图。3.学生准备餐具词卡。教学过程: Step1 Preparation
1、Sing a song“What would you like?”
2、词卡复习plate, knife, chopsticks, spoon, fork.3、听录音,齐做P61,Let’s do Step2 Presentation 1.师手指教学挂图,说:look!Dinner is ready, what would you like for dinner? 再问:Do you like Chinese food or English food? 然后板书并领读:I like Chinese food ,It’s yummy.师进一步说:Help yourself!并板书教读。
2.师出示刀叉,说:I can use the fork and knife, Let me show you, Can you use the
fork and knife?帮助学生回答,然后板书并读:I can use the fork and knife / chopsticks.Let me show you , /Let me try.3.晚餐结束时,我们可以说we had a good time ,Good night, see you tomorrow,师板书并齐读。Step3 Practice 1.听音答题
把听到的句子选出来,师检查答案并释义: ⑴Help yourself.⑵We had a good time.⑶See you tomorrow.2、听音正音 跟读对话,纠正发音 3.合作共建
四人一组分角色朗读课文,必要时请老师指导。4.表演展示
请学生用恰当的语音语调表演对话。读的最流畅的一组获胜。
Let’s chant :先让学生观察图片,说出英语名称,用Pass me 分别说出句子。师再放录音,跟录音齐说。Step4 Production 小组内试着编一组新对话,用本课会餐时的语言材料。Step5 Progress
1、小结:总结本课主要内容。
3..Read and choose.⑴A : ? B: Thank you.⑵A : ? B: Me too.⑶A : ? B: Good night.⑷A : ? B: ok, Here you are.A.Pass me the Chopsticks.I like Chinese food.B.I like Chinese food.C.Help yourself.D.Good night.3.HW: 听录音,读熟对话。
第五课时
教学内容:B Read and write C Let’s check 教学目标:
能力知识目标:
1、掌握单词 rice, chicken fish,2、能听懂:What would you like for dinner? 情感、策略、文化目标:培养学生学习英语的积极态度,勇于进行交际实践的能力,同伴间合作的能力。教学重点:四个四会单词拼读。教学难点:四个四会单词拼读。
课前准备:师准备带有四线格的图片,学生准备词卡,图片。教学过程: Step 1 Preparation
1、Sing a song “What would you like?”
2、P62 Let’s chant.3、让学生分组分角色表演对话。Step 2 Presentation
1、师接着上一环节出示图片,问:Would you like rice? Can you spell rice? 师出示词卡并贴在黑板上,齐拼读、个别拼读,进一步问学生,what would you like for dinner?引导学生齐说:I’d like some rice.2.同样方法教学 beef, fish, chicken.3.听读正音 4.合作共建 Step 3 Practice Read and say
1、Ask and answer in pairs.S1: What would you like for dinner? S2: I’d like some chicken, c-h-i-c-k-e-n.2、Write down the words, copy them five times.3、组内比赛记单词。Write and say 1.让学生自己做,师解释You can’t eat so much.“你不能吃这么多” 2.师检查学生做的情况 3.齐读
4.合上课本,手拿图片,比赛谁说的熟练。Step 4 Production
1、Make a survey:小组内一人扮记者,调查组内同学。用What would you like for dinner? I’d like……作答。
2、Let’s check P23 第一遍只听不选,第二遍边听边选,第三遍检查。Step5 Progress 小结:让学生总结,老师补充。配套:P38
1、listen and write(1)chicken ②fish ③rice ④ beef
2、Read and write A:What would you like for dinner? B:I’d like some
鸡蛋图
A:Can I have some, please.一碗大米图。B:Sure ,Here you are.A:Would you like some
? 牛肉图 B:Yes ,please.A:I’d like some。鱼图 B:OK.Here you are.Homework:
1、抄写四会单词五遍,试着默写一遍。
2、把Write and say 部分,熟读并自己表达出来。
四年级英语上册课件 篇5
小学英语四年级上册教案及教学反思
一、教案设计
根据小学英语四年级上册的教学内容和教学目标,我设计了以下教案:
Unit 1: Greetings
教学目标:
1. 学习问候的基本表达方式。
2. 能够正确使用“Hello!”、“Hi!”、“Good morning/afternoon/evening!”等问候语。
3. 学习并演练与别人互相问候的对话。
4. 通过游戏和活动,提高学生的口语表达能力。
教学准备:
1. 音频和多媒体设备。
2. PPT和图片素材。
3. 教学卡片和游戏道具。
教学步骤:
Step 1: Warm-up (10分钟)
1. 通过放映问候的图片,引导学生回忆不同场景的问候语。
2. 老师和学生互相问候,激发学生的兴趣。
Step 2: Presentation (15分钟)
1. 准备好带有问候语的图片,通过图片展示和音频引导学生学习问候语。
2. 引导学生模仿音频中的语音语调,正确发音问候语。
3. 分小组进行角色扮演,练习多种问候方式。
Step 3: Practice (20分钟)
1. 使用教学卡片,设计情景对话练习,让学生运用所学问候语与别人进行对话。
2. 引导学生在小组内自由组织对话,并指导其中一名学生担任小组代表进行展示。
Step 4: Game (15分钟)
1. 创设情境,让学生用英语进行问候和回答。
2. 将学生分为几个小组,比赛看哪个小组能够正确回答最多的问候语。
Step 5: Consolidation (10分钟)
1. 老师总结当堂课的内容,检查学生的掌握情况。
2. 小结并布置课后作业。
二、教学反思
在本堂课中,我通过生动有趣的教学活动和游戏,激发了学生学习英语的兴趣,提高了他们的参与度。通过图片、音频以及角色扮演等多种教学方式,帮助学生掌握了问候语的基本表达方式,并能够在实际生活中进行简单问候的对话。
然而,也存在一些问题。首先,教学时间的掌握不够准确,导致了后面的活动进行得有些仓促。同时,学生的自主参与程度还有待提高,有些学生在角色扮演和游戏中的表现还不够积极。
针对以上问题,我计划在今后的教学过程中做出一些调整。在教学时间安排上,我会更加合理地分配时间,确保每个环节都充分利用时间进行学习和练习。在激发学生参与度上,我将尝试引入更多互动游戏和小组合作活动,鼓励学生积极参与课堂讨论和表演,提高他们的口语表达能力。
总的来说,本次教学虽然存在一些问题,但也有一些亮点。通过及时反思并做出调整,相信我的教学会越来越好,学生的英语水平也会得到提高。
四年级英语上册课件 篇6
本节通过学生最熟悉的环境――my home 的有关介绍以及拟人化的动物在家中的行为动作的生动画面,展示“家”的一般结构、设置用途,及其用英语如何说明、描述,然后依次经过let’s learn let’sdo let’stalk let’ssay let’swrite writeandsay 等环节,为师生提供了交错循环出现并呈螺旋上升的教学载体,内容图文结合,生动有趣,结构性知识点的出现都不是机械的,而是通过不同的场景,大大满足了学生喜欢新奇的心理。编者意图是使学生初步认识介绍家庭环境设置、物体的位置,培养学生综合运用语言的能力和学习英语的兴趣。
本节内容是学生非常熟悉的,但由于学生的兴趣、爱好、识记、基础知识和技能方面参差不齐,教学设计必须照顾到那部分词汇积累较少、听说技能有困难的学生。
1学会单词:study (书房) , bathroom, livingroom,bedroom,kitchen .
2会用句型:“whereis (are )…?”,“is (are )…?”.
1使学生通过图文结合,理解语句内容,培养学生善于借助情境理解语义的能力。
2通过“do alk play write write and say ”等活动提高学生听、说、读、写的能力。
培养学生进一步学习英语的兴趣,大胆说英语的自信及激发他们用英语交流的欲望。
重点:学习本课生词,掌握“whereis (are )…?”,“is (are )…?”句型,会朗读句子,理解语义。
难点:能用上本课所学的家里设施和用品的单词介绍自己的家,知道“take ”“have ”在本课中的运用。
四年级英语上册课件 篇7
1、通过练习课本第22、第23页Let’s practise(Ⅰ)、(Ⅱ)掌握本课的主要内容。
2、让学生表演各种动作,进一步练习巩固现在进行时。
二、教学重、难点(Key points and difficult points)
1、重点练习“现在进行时”复数形式的表达法。
We are jumping rope.
They are playing volleyball.
2、通过动作、表演以及游戏掌握第22、第23页的练习。通过比较,引导学生理解现在进行时与一般现在时的用法。
3、要求学生进一步掌握Let’s go and join him/them的不同意义和用法。
1、老师带领学生复习时间的表示法。
What time is it?
It’s…
Is it time to…?
Yes,(No,)it’s time to…
What time do you…?
At…
2、老师带领学生复习星期的表示法。
What day is it today?
It’s Sunday/Monday/Tuesday/Wednesday/Thursday/Friday/Saturday.
3、老师将准备好的跳绳、篮球、足球、排球等拿出来分给一些学生,指导他们开展各种活动。然后,老师指着个别学生问大家:What is he/she/David doing? He/She is playing… He/She is jumping rope.老师再指着一些踢球的同学问大家:What are they doing? They are playing… They are running.
4、老师放录音,学生完成第21页Listen, look and match。
1、学生用自己的图片进行What is he/she/David doing? He/She is playing… He/She is jumping rope的问答练习。
2、让个别学生到前面来,举起自己的图片问其他学生:What is he/she/David doing?What are they doing?这时,老师可以叫一个学生背对图片来猜He/She is playing… He/She is jumping rope. They are playing… They are running.做练习的同时,老师板书I am doing… He/She is doing… We are doing… You are doing… They are doing…提醒学生观察进行时态的动词结构,强调现在进行时态中助动词be要与主语人称和数一致。
3、老师再将准备好的跳绳、篮球、足球、排球等拿出来分给学生,并指导他们活动起来。然后,老师抽查个别学生说:What is he/she/David doing?待这个学生回答He/She is playing…后,老师说:Let’s go and join him/her.并带几个学生去参加其他学生的活动。复数形式也可以这样练。
4、学生两人一组进行第22页的对话练习。等大家都练完后,老师可以叫个别同学看图回答问题。也可以叫4~5人一组合作完成这个练习。
1、听录音,读课文。
2、和父母一起练习对话。
3、预习《活动手册》第Ⅲ题。
Ⅲ. Listen and say.
录音内容:
The boys are playing basketball.
The girls are playing volleyball.
They are doing their homework.
We are doing our homework.
We like playing.
We like studying.
1、通过唱Days of the week这首歌,让学生进一步掌握一周7天的表示法。
2、通过口、笔试练习,要求学生掌握现在进行时各人称和系动词的搭配。
3、让学生看图说对话并进行情景表演。
1、学生学会本课的歌曲,人人知道意思并能进行表演。
2、通过口、笔头练习,要求学生进一步掌握现在进行时各人称的不同表示法,以及它们与系动词的搭配。灵活使用He/She is doing something. We/They/You/The boys are doing something.
老师带录音机和自制的周历、图片。学生拿《活动手册》、打球、做游戏、跳绳、玩悠悠球的图片。
T:Is it time to go home?
S:No, it’s time to play games.
T:Oh, we play games on Wednesday.
Let’s go and play. Look!
What is he doing?
S:He is playing football.
1、先用自制的周历提问What day is it today复习一周七天。
2、让学生听录音欣赏一遍歌曲。
3、老师讲解这首歌的意思。
Sunday la la la,
Monday la la la,
Tuesday la la la , Wednesday,
Ia Thursday la la la ,
Friday la la la , Saturday.
星期天,啦啦啦,星期一,啦啦啦,
星期二,啦啦啦,星期三,啦,
星期四,啦啦啦,星期五,啦啦啦,
星期六。这就构成了一星期。
4、老师带领大家读这几个词,然后反复放录音教学生学唱这首歌。
5、老师和同学们一起唱,并分组进行比赛。
老师拿起几张图片和学生进行问答练习。老师说问句:
What is he/she/David doing?
He/She is playing…
What are they/you doing?
They/We are playing…
1、完成《活动手册》上没有做完的练习。
2、预习下一课。
3、准备一些可以做礼物的材料。
四年级英语上册课件 篇8
教学内容:
教学第24页例8和“练一练”,练习五第6-11题。
教学目标:
1、让学生探索笔算被除数和除数末尾都有O的除法的简便算法,掌握这种计算方法,并加深对商不变的规律的理解。
2、让学生通过学习体会解决问题方法的多样性,培养优化方法的意识,增加学习数学的兴趣。
3、通过课堂学习获得成功的体验,增强学好数学的自信心。
教学重难点:
重点:探索笔算被除数和除数末尾都有O的除法的简便算法,掌握这种计算方法,并加深对商不变的规律的理解。
难点:通过学习体会解决问题方法的多样性,培养优化方法的意识,增加学习数学的兴趣。
1、出示例题:队鼓的单价是50元,王老师带了900元,可以买多少个?
学生读题后列出算式。提问:想一想能不能使笔算变得简单些,又使商不变?学生讨论、交流后发现想使计算简便可以把被除数和除数同时除以10再计算。
谈话:用这种方法算一遍,并在第24页的横线上填一上得数。
2、谈话:现在如果队号的单价为40元,王老师带的钱可以买多少个,还剩多少元?你会算吗?
学生独立列式,并尝试自己用简便疗法计算,指名板演。
观察板演的算式,学生在余数是“2”还是“20”上形成争论后引导学生开展小组讨论。
学生思考、讨沦,交流想法。教师在学生初步归纳的基础上适当讲解。
谈话:余数是20对不对呢?我们可以验算一下。学生试着进行验算。指名板演验算过程。谈话:通过验算.我们可以进一步明确余数应该是20。
1、做练习五第7题。
让学生观察算式,找出题目中的错误之处。
在小组里讨论错在哪里。
提问:谁能说说这两题计算得对吗?不对,错在哪里?
学生交流,分析错题原因,各自在书上改正,在小组里互相检查改得对不对。
要使学生体会到应用商不变的规律,被除数和除数只能划去相同个数的O;如果竖式中有余数,要把被除数中划去的0补上才是题目的余数。
提问:什么样的题目可以运用商不变的规律进行简便计算?
计算时要注意什么?
五、布置作业。
练习五第8、10、11题。
教学反思:
四年级英语上册课件 篇9
2、学会介绍自己并询问他人姓名,能够利用所学知识进行打招呼.
3、能听懂听力对话并能对根据听力对话进行自由交际.
【学习重点】: 使学生学会打招呼和介绍自己,并询问他人姓名的句型.
Nice to meet you . What's your name ? My name is ......
【学习过程】:
1、 认真观察第一页的图画,小组讨论你所认识的物品的英语单词.
2,、试着写出含有的物品的英语单词.
学习任务二: 学会介绍自己并询问他人姓名,能够利用所学知识进行打招呼.
1、 教师自我介绍,引导学生介绍自己.
A: Hello , I am Gina , What's your name ?
2、小组竞赛, 两人一组,询问他人姓名,介绍自己.
3,、分角色朗读1A对话.
学习任务三: 能听懂听力对话并能对根据听力对话进行自由交际.
1,、听录音, 给1B 的对话编号.
2、根据听力对话进行自由交际.
3、小组竞赛, 展示对话交际。
二、合作共建(教师寄语:Many hands make light work. )
小组讨论我们所学的英语名字和汉语名字的区别, 如何用英语拼写你的名字?
三、系统总结(教师寄语:No man can do two things at once.)
1,、归纳你所学到的问候语.
2、自己编写一个打招呼并询问姓名的小对话.
(一) 单项选择.
1. _______your name ? My name is Gina .
A. What B. What's C. Who D. which
2. Good morning , Miss Wang ! _____________!
A. Hello B.Hi C. Nice to meet you D. Good morning
3. I _______Sally , What______ your name ?
A. am ,is B. is , am C. is , is D.am, am
4. ______name is Li lei .
A. I B. I am C. My D. you
5.— _______, What's your name ?
— John Green .
A. Hi B. Ok C. sorry D. Excuse me
(二) 写出下列单词的完全形式, 并写出汉语意思.
I'm _________ __________ what's __________ ________
(三)写出下列单词.
时钟 _______ 我的 ________ 你的___________ 名字_______ 遇见_________
(四)尝试翻译下列句子.
1. 见到你很高兴. _________________________________.
2.我叫王小雨. ____________________________________.
3. 你叫什么名字? ____________________________________
(五) 根据情景补全对话.
B: ____________________!
A; I ______Lucy . _________your name ?
B: My ______ is Jim . Nice to ______you !
A: _______________________________.
五、【课后反思】(教师寄语:Never do things by halves)
四年级英语上册课件 篇10
义务教育第三册
英语教案
第二课时
一、教学目标
1.要求学生能听懂录音并找出相应的照片,然后连线。2.看图并根据图中的意思写出句子中所缺的单词,能理解每一句话的意思。3.“四会”词句:her, his, my This is my mum.This is my dad.This is me.二、教学重难点 要求学生写出句子中所缺的单词。在能听懂录音的情况下完成书中的句子。三 教学用具
书、照片、单词卡片。
四、教学过程
(一)复习导入 教师用照片介绍自己的家庭成员,引导学生也用自己的照片给同桌做相应的介绍。教师让学生拿出自己的照片试着向全班同学介绍自己的家庭成员。
(二)巩固练习做课本上的 Listen,look and match.2做课本上 Let’s practice.让学生先观察图片,然后教师问:Who is he? 学生回答:This is my dad.教师问:请问哪位同学知道这个空怎么填?学生齐答:填 dad教师说:Very good.请填写。然后教师问:Do you know,what is his name?
谁还记得?大家说:His name is bob.教师说:请大家填写。
4.观察第三幅图,让学生猜Who is he? 学生回答:This is me.让学生填空,并问大家:What is your name? 学生边回答边填写:My name is Linda.同时出示写好的单词卡片。学生两人一组练习完成的句子,并用自己的照片做对话。
(三)做活动手册的听力练习。1.Listen,repeat and match.Listen and fill in the blanks.(四)作业
听写“四会”句子和单词。
第二课时
一、教学目标: 1 巩固前面所学内容。
2学会如何灵活运用本课句型做情景对话练习。“四会”词句:
Who is that?
This is my aunt.This is my uncle.This is my cousin.二、教学重难点: 掌握 This is… 句型的表达法。2 掌握 Who’s that? 的表达法。
三、教学用具:
图片,照片,录音机。
四、教学过程:
(一)复习导入: 1 师生对话: T:Hello, boys and we are going to learn the second part of Lesson2.Are you ready for the class.S: Yes, I’m ready.2 进入复习。教师先出示照片向学生介绍说:This is my uncle and this is my aunt.This is my cousin.然后让学生同桌间用照片互相介绍。
(二)巩固练习听listen ,look and match.部分录音,让学生跟读,并找出相对应的图片来连线。
同桌间互相指着书上的图片练习。2做课本上Let’s practise 1
让学生三人一组扮演不同角色练习对话。3 做课本上
Let’s practice.让学生每人带一张“全家福”轮流上台向全班同学介绍。
(三)作业 完整听本课录音。2 三人一组练习对话。
第二课时
一、教学目标 掌握书中出现的新单词。能够运用所学句型自由对话。3 “四会”句子: He is friendly.He is lovely.They are Linda’s grandpa and grandma.二、教学重难点 掌握“四会”句子.2 学会人名的说法:Jane, Smith, Jason
三、教学用具 照片,录音机。
四、教学过程
(一)复习导入:
Hello, boys and girls.First let’s sing “Come and see my family”.然后教师出示照片问:Who are they? 学生回答:They are my grandpa and grandma.(二)巩固练习
1.听 Listen,look and match 部分录音,让学生跟读所听到的句子,找出相应的图片连线,然后让学生拿出自己的照片和同桌做练习。
继续听录音,让学生跟读句子找出相应的图片连线,然后领读he isfriendly.让学生理解 friendly 如:Mr Wang is friendly.2. 做课本 Let’s practise 1
让学生看图中人物,两人一组练习对话。3.做课本 Let’s practise 2.先让学生完成例图,然后照样子做一张自己家的 Family Tree 4.做《活动手册》中的第4、7题。
(三)作业 完整听本课录音。2 两人一组练习对话。
第二课时
一、教学目标: 1.熟练掌握句型:
How many people are there in your family?
Five
Who are they ? They are my mnm dad and I „ 2.能用本课句型自由对话。
二、教学重难点
重点: How many people …?
难点:能正确用 how many+名词复数形式…?
三、教学用具 单词卡片,四、教学过程 1.组织课堂 学说韵文。2.复习
快速认读one 到ten。
用图片让学生认读名称词。3.介绍新课
(1)复习对话并引出
。然后进行师生对话。
(2)放录音,让学生听课本 Listen ,look and say.部分,提问: How many „? 解释句子:What about you?
你呢?(用于问同样的问题)4.练习巩固
让学生分角色表演课本上的对话。做课本 Let’s practice
部分练习。5.布置作业 听读第5课。
第二课时
一、教学目标
1.能听懂并会说单词: 2.熟练掌握句型: What is your father? He is „
Is the girl your sister? Yes ,she is
二、教学重、难点
What is your father︱ mother ?
三、教学用具,照片,录音机。
四、教学过程; 1.组织课堂
唱一支学过的英语歌曲,师生问候,开始上课。2.复习
快速抢答单词.复习对话: 3.介绍新课
介绍新句型:What is he ?
用图片反复练习句子:
What’s he ?
He is a … What is she?
She is a 4 练习巩固
听录音,让学生边看图边听录音。让学生两人一组练习课本上的对话。5.布置作业
(1)口头做《活动手册》第5题。(2)听读课本的对话部分,并背诵。
第二课时
一、教学目标: 1.复习巩固单词: 2.熟练掌握句型: What is your mother ? She is a nurse.What is in your hand ? A photo of my family?
二、教学重难点
重点:What is your mother ? She is a … 难点:该句型的熟练运用。
三、教学用具
图片,实物,录音机。
四、教学过程 1.组织课堂
唱歌曲:what’s he ? 师生问候,开始上课。
2.复习对话:师生自由对话,用上问候语、告别语、致谢语,问姓名、年龄、班级等。
3.介绍新课 理解句子:
What is he? 他是做什么的?
What is in your hand ?.。你手里的是什么? A photo of my family.我家的照片 4.练习巩固:
让学生两人一组分角色朗读课文对话。5.让学生做《活动手册》上的题。6.布置作业
听读第六课录音。
第二课时
一、教学目标: 能够听懂、会说、会演本课对话。学会怎样向别人介绍自己的家人和朋友。3 “四会”词句: kind, classmate, friend Welcome to our school.Nice to meet you.Are you a pupil in Grade 4?
二、教学重、难点:
1.掌握一般疑问句的问答方式。2.掌握所在年级的表达。
三、教学用具:
人物头饰、录音机。
四、教学过程:
(一)一复习导入 1.师生对话
2.听录音模仿人物,并跟读。3.三人一组分角色表演对话。
(二)二新授
1.教师放录音,让学生重复每句话。教师领读每个句子并让学生一个一个地读。
2.教师拿着图片给学生描述图片场景。如:Welcome to our school.3.同桌间用自己的图片相互描述图片的场景。
4.让学生表演各种场景。如:Nice to meet you.My mother is kind.等。
(三)巩固练习1.教师读This is our new classmate.几遍。做出欢迎状,教师领读Welcome to our class.几遍。
2.教师教读This is my friend.和What about you ? 几遍,让学生重复并翻译。
3.学生三人一组,分角色练习对话。
(四)作业
1.完整听本课录音,并重复跟读。2.书写“四会”句子和单词。
第二课时
一、教学目标
能听懂、会说、会演本课练习中的对话。会识别他人所在的位置。“四会”词句:
on the left, on the right, in the middle
二、教学重难点:
能够清楚地表达某人所在的位置。把所学内容灵活运用到实际生活中。
三、教学用具 录音机,图片。
四、教学过程
(一)复习导入 师生对话:
T: Wow ,what a beautiful photo!
S:This is my family picture.T:Who is the young woman on the right? S:She is my mother,and this is my father.(二)巩固练习
1.做Listen, look and match部分练习。2.做 Let’s practise 1 3.做 Let’s practise 2 4.猜人游戏:教师让三个学生背对着大家站着前面,老师问: Who is on the right/ on the left/ in the middle? 让学生分别来猜左、中右的人是谁?
(三)作业
1.做《活动手册》中的第4题。
2.用英语给家长介绍自己所学的方位词.7
第二课时
一、教学目标:
1了解现在进行时的表达方式。2掌握感叹句的用法。3 能听懂、会说句型: Let’s have a family dinnr.Let’s get together on Sunday evening.二、教学重难点
1.掌握现在进行时的表达方式。2.学习句型 let’s…
三、教学用具 图片,录音机。
四、教学过程
(一)复习导入
出示各种图片和单词卡片,问学生:what’s this? What are they?
(二)巩固练习
1.介绍现在进行时态:is/ am/ are/ doing 表示正在进行的事情。如对话中的are getting together…
正聚在一起。are having a big dinner … 正在用餐。
2做 listen, look and match 部分练习。
3.教师放录音,学生跟读每一句话,并找出相应的图片连线。4 两人一组根据情景表演对话。
(三)作业
1.做《活动手册》中的第8题。完整听本课录音。
第二课时
一、教学目标:
1学会如何表达自己和他人的处所。
2灵活运用所学句型,并能在日常生活中使用。
3能听、说、认、读单词:vegetable,New Year ,London,Paris
二、教学重难点;
1.能根据图中的地点做替换练习。
2.能根据图画中的情景,描述居住的地点。
三、教学用具
图片,单词卡片,录音机。
四、教学过程
(一)复习导入:
1.Let’s sing an English song “the more we get together” twice.2.师生对话:
T: What picture is it? S: It’s a picture of my family.(二)巩固练习
1.做 Listen,look and match 部分练习。
教师出示图片A,问学生:Where do your grandma and grandpa live?学生回答:They live on a farm.教师出示图片B,问学生: Where do your uncle and cousin live?学生回答:They live in a village.教师出示图片C,问学生:Where do they live? 学生回答:They
教师出示图片D,问学生:Where do you live?学生回答:I live in a flat with my father and mother.2.做Let’s practise.1
3.做 Let’s practise2
(三)作业
1.完整听本课录音。
2.把图片的场景描述给自己的家人听。
第二课时
一、教学目标:
1.掌握have,has的用法。
2.掌握句形:What do you have? I have… 3.能够把所学知识灵活运用到实际生活中。4.“四会”单词和句子: fish, a little,big, fat, luvely, bird, What do you have?
二、教学重、难点
1.Have ,has 在使用时的区别。2. 能听懂、会说本课对话。
三、教学用具
各种动物图片,录音机。
四、教学过程
(一)复习导入 师生对话:
Where do you live? I live on a farm.What do you have? I have a cow, a dog, a goat,a duck and a hen.(二)巩固练习
1.讲述 have ,has 的用法及其与there be 结构的不同:there be 表示某处有某物,强调某物的存在,have, has 表示某人有某物,强调某物的所属。
2.做 Listen,look and match.部分练习。
(1)教师出示一张奶牛图片,说: I have a cow.问学生: Do you have a cow?
学生回答:Yes, I have a cow.教师领读几遍.(2)让学生看图,完整听录音并跟读然后指出相应的图片连线。3.做 Let’s practise 2.(三)作业
1.完整听本课录音,并模仿。2.做《活动手册》中的第6题。
第二课时
一、教学目标:
1.能够看图描述各种房间的状况。2.掌握几种表示方位的词。3.“四会”句子:
Where is your bedroom ? It is in the middle.二、教学重、难点
学会用形容词描述房间。
三、教学用具 图片,录音机。
四、教学过程
(一)复习导入 师生对话:
Where do you live? I live in the flat..What do you have? We have two bedrooms…
(二)巩固练习
1.学习句子:Where is your bedroom ? It is in the middle.2.做 Listen,look and match.部分练习。
(1)教师出示图片,介绍句子意思,学生选择,教师领读句子几遍.(2)让学生看图,完整听录音并跟读然后指出相应的图片连线。3.做 Let’s practise 2.(三)作业
1.完整听本课录音,并模仿。2.做《活动手册》中的第6题。
四年级英语上册课件 篇11
一、教学目的
1、激发学生学习英语的兴趣,培养他们学习英语的积极态度,使他们初步建立学习英语的自信心;
2、培养学生具有一定的语感和良好的语音、语调书写基础,以及良好的学习习惯;
3、使他们初步具备用英语进行简单日常交流的能力。
4、同时培养学生的观察、记忆、思维、想象和创造能力。
5、适当介绍中西方文化,培养学生的爱国主义精神,增强世界意志,为学生的进一步学习奠定良好的基础。
二、教材分析
《义务教育课程标准实验教科书英语》供三年级起使用,是人民教育出版社与加拿大Lingo.Media国际集团合作编写的一套全新的中下学衔接的英语教材。这套教材是根据教育部制定的《国家英语课程标准》和《小学英语教学基本要求》编写而成的。本册供以小学三年级为起点、开设英语的学校第一学年第一学期使用。
《义务教育课程标准实验教科书英语》的设计和编写体现了外语教学思想的继承和发展。在分析、研究许多种国内外小学英语教材的基础上,取其精华,博采众长,形成了本套教材特有的编写体系。同时,有吸收了当今国内外英语作为外语教学的理论和成功经验,把这些教学理论和实践经验同我国的小学外语教学实际相结合,以形成我国小学英语的外语教学模式和教学方法。
本册教材具有以下几个特点:
1、注重学生语言运用能力的培养,突出语言的实践性和交际性,同时也突出语言的真实性和实用性。
2、注重学生自学能力和学习策略的培养,为学生的进一步学习或终身学习奠定基础。
3、注重中外文化的双向交流,使学生通过学习,培养未来跨文化交际所需要的能力。
4、注重学生学习兴趣的培养,以不同方式最大限度的激发学生的学习动机。
5、注重融合学科内容,加强学科之间的整合和渗透,让学生通过英语学习来获得其他学科的知识。
6、注重教材的灵活性和可操作性,以满足不同层次的学生的需求。
7、注重教学资料的配套,为学生提供良好的英语学习环境,帮助学生拓展自我发展的空间。
8、注重中小学各阶段的衔接,以保证各学段的顺利过渡,全面提高中小学英语教学的整体质量。
三、教学措施
1、认真备课,钻研教材,抓紧课堂教学,做到当堂内容当堂掌握。
2、运用各种不同的肢体语言来辅助教学。
3、在课堂上多开展一些有趣的活动、游戏让学生在活动中学习英语,在生活中学习英语。
4、多为学生营造一些学习氛围,如:创设英语角等等。
5、要求学生在课余时间尽量的运用已经学习的英语进行对话。
6、多看英语画报,多读英语故事,多看英语书籍。
7、多与学生交流,进行口语交际训练。
四、主要教学目标:
1、能听懂、会说12组会话,并能进行简单的交流。
2、能听、说、认读60个单词和词组并能听、说、读、写61个单词和24个句子(包括学校、时间、衣服、天气、购物、农场动物、数字、颜色等几个话题),并简单运用。
3、能听、做6个TPR活动。
4、能学会3个小制作。
5、能唱8首歌曲。
6、能听、说、唱7首歌谣。
7、能完成6个自我评价活动。
8、能听懂6个幽默小故事。
9、能了解6项简单的中西方文化知识。
五、方法措施
1、认真备课,钻研教材,进行课堂的有效教学,提高课堂效率,做到当堂内容当堂掌握。
2、创新运用各种不同英语教学法来辅助教学,如:情景教学法、直接教学法和TPR全身反应法,并开展一些有趣的活动、游戏让学生在轻松的氛围中学习英语。
3、创设英语情景和环境,使学生们在一定的英语语言环境里习得“第二语言”。做到“生活中有英语,英语中有生活”。
4、鼓励学生大胆说英语,相信希望生的进步,树立学生的信心,培养学生朗读和书写的习惯。
5、注重教材的灵活性和可操作性,以满足不同层次的学生的需求。帮助英语基础不好的学生,提升英语基础好的学生。
6、练习形式多种多样,手、脑、眼、肢体并用,静态、动态结合,基本功操练与自由练习结合,单项和综合练习结合。通过大量地实践,使学生具有良好地语音、语调、书写和拼读地基础,开展学生简单的日常用语交流活动。
、班级情况分析、学生情况
我校四年级的学生已学习了三年的英语,有一定的基础。他们思维活跃,模仿能力和记忆力较强,所以应针对不同的学生进行分层次教学,我相信将会达到预期的效果;四年级学生基本掌握一定的英语日常用语,具备一定的英语基础,因此对他们而言,英语基础知识需要继续深入的渗透,把重点放到听、说、读、写的要求上。 扩大学生对西方国家了解的知识领域,充分发展学生在生活中使用英语的能力和习惯。
三、教学目的、任务
1、提升学生学习英语的兴趣,养成良好的朗读书写的习惯;
2、发音准确、朗读流利,准确掌握书中的重点内容;
3、能够进行简单的日常用语的交流,能够用简单的句子进行写作;
4、强调语言运用。本教材体现交际教学思想,注重学生语言应用能力的培养。在起始阶段采用"全身动作反应法",让学生在做中学,在唱中学,在玩中学。
5、突出兴趣激发。教学形式多样化,其中包括对话、歌谣、小诗、绕口令、游戏、任务、绘画等
四、教学重点难点
1.重点:
(1)提高课堂效率。
(2)养成良好的听英语、读英语、说英语的习惯。
(3)发音清楚,语调正确,书写工整。
2.难点:使英语基础差的学生提高听、说、读、写的能力,全面提高英语成绩。
五、方法措施
1、认真备课,钻研教材,进行课堂的有效教学,提高课堂效率,做到当堂内容当堂掌握。
2、创新运用各种不同英语教学法来辅助教学,如:情景教学法、直接教学法和TPR全身反应法,并开展一些有趣的活动、游戏让学生在轻松的氛围中学习英语。
3、创设英语情景和环境,使学生们在一定的英语语言环境里习得“第二语言”。做到“生活
中有英语,英语中有生活”。
4、鼓励学生大胆说英语,相信希望生的进步,树立学生的信心,培养学生朗读和书写的习惯。
5、注重教材的灵活性和可操作性,以满足不同层次的学生的需求。帮助英语基础不好的学生,提升英语基础好的学生。
6、练习形式多种多样,手、脑、眼、肢体并用,静态、动态结合,基本功操练与自由练习结合,单项和综合练习结合。通过大量地实践,使学生具有良好地语音、语调、书写和拼读地基础,开展学生简单的日常用语交流活动。